Home

WLDR ReferenceBook - Steven Engineering

1. i m FH nome Online gt Monitor gt Online gt Link This option displays the PLC network When the Start button is pushed WindLDR begins to display all the PLC numbers which are networked to the working PLC This option also allows you to keep track of all the PLC s on the network and all of the data routing 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 5 Online gt Monitor gt Online gt Communication Error This option displays any errors which may occur during communication giving you a chance to troubleshoot the system You can simply clear the errors by click ing the Clear button a 4 1 a Online 2 Monitor gt Online gt PLC status Status Dialog ONC Micro and Micro C This option displays PLC information start and stop status error status timer counter settings calendar and protect status 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 6 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When an ONC PLC is active and the PLC status option is selected from the Online monitoring screen the ONC Status Dialog screen will display CEDE Lo mim L lans e Pee ite zen Micro Micro C NOTE The following instructions and field descriptions are applicable to the ONC Micro and Micro C PLC 5 To return to the moni
2. WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A1 13 This section describes allocation numbers available only for Micro C For details about allocation numbers shared with the Micro refer to the Allocation Table for the Micro on page A1 6 The expanded functions available with the Micro C include e has 500 data registers D0 D499 D499 is used to enable or disable the expansion control data registers D484 D498 and cannot be used as an ordinary data register to store data e Special internal relay M307 has different functions when used as a base or expansion station in the expansion link system or when used as a master sta tion or slave station in the data link system Available I O numbers depend on the type and combination of base units used in the expansion link system 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 1 14 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Allocation Table for the Operand Processing Allocation Maximum Points Mode Number Input Standard and 10 17 14 points base 14 high speed 110 115 points expansion Standard only 120 127 130 135 Output Standard and 90 07 10 points base 10 high speed 10 points expansion Standard only 020 027 Q30 Q31 APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 0 1004 B Om Cfo Ife JWa eh WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A1 15 Internal Relay Standard and M
3. NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option Use the Load LOD instruction before an operand starting at the left bus of the ladder diagram The LOD instruction starts the logical operation with a nor mally open NO contact The following chart provides all normally open LOD operands 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 9 Instruction Standard High Speed 000 035 000 015 000 031 000 011 000 317 000 047 290 297 300 317 000 031 000 015 000 031 000 015 000 063 000 031 5 Accept the default Normally Open the Type field Then enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Next enter the appropriate operand in the Allocation Number field Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the normally open instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the normally open instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button 2001 IDEC CORPORAT
4. Input Number Syntax 10 Monitor input 0 one bit 10 Monitor inputs 0 7 one byte 40 Monitor output 0 one bit 0 Monitor outputs 0 7 one byte m0 Monitor internal relay 0 one bit Mo Monitor internal relays 0 7 one byte 9 Timer 0 current value one word TO Timer 0 preset value one word 0 Counter 0 current value one word Co Counter 0 preset value one word DO Read data register 0 one word 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 17 Online gt Monitor gt Online gt Point Write The Point Write Dialog screen allows you to change the preset values for inputs outputs internal relays and shift and data registers while the PLC is running The Point Write Dialog screen also allows you to change the preset values for timers for counters and for data registers whether or not the PLC is running This option is particularly useful for entering preset values for high speed counters when data registers are used Use the Word Write field to make changes to timers counters and data registers H fei ho BH nat gt ps H pa Ji gr p fooom H ma Enn pores Point Write Dialog Box Type of data displayed Word Write To change the preset values of timers counters and data registers complete the following steps within
5. PULS 51 When input is on output QO generates pulse output The output pulse fre quency is determined by the base frequency selection and source operand S1 according to the equation on page 9 153 When the input is off output QO remains off NOTE Either the PULS or PWM instruction can be used only once in a user program Valid Operands Standard Processing Operand S1 Source 1 Function Pulse width coefficient D 0 99 for Micro 0 498 for Micro C Constant 0 249 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 152 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL While the Micro base unit is running the base frequency selection cannot be changed To change the output pulse frequency during operation use a data reg ister as source operand S1 and change the value of the data register When a data register is designated as 51 make sure that the value of the data reg ister does not exceed 249 If the value of the data register designated as 51 exceeds 249 during operation then a user program execution error will occur Then the ERRI indicator on the Micro base unit is lit and special internal relay M304 is also turned on Correct the program and transfer the corrected pro gram to the Micro base unit When a data register is designated as 51 the data is read as the user program is scanned When changing the value of the data register designated as S1 change the value slowl
6. 1a CE g Elit E ET gt mwt Deuss ied ee Frai rau hs Eataa Eidel An E ira LEER aj t 15 oe 5 3T m INSIDIIS 3 FILE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 3 3 File Name Within the Open dialog box select a file name by clicking to highlight it or enter the desired ladder file into the File Name field List Files of Type All ladder files should have the file extension Directories Unless otherwise specified the default directory of all ladder files is C windldr If you wish to access another directory use the scroll bars and your mouse button to highlight the appropriate directory Drives Use the arrow icon and your mouse button to select among available drives within this field In general the drive is your hard drive and the drive is your floppy drive Once the appropriate file name drive and directory have been selected click the OK button To back out of this option without opening a file click the Cancel button NOTE You may open up to 11 ladder files at once File2 Save Selecting the Save option from the File menu saves the active WindLDR ladder file complete with PLC settings and ladder preferences You may also click the toolbar button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 3 FILE MENU 3 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL File gt Save As Selectin
7. Pulge Altus ali Hares T wedi Hx Carmani D gp Hx O 73 120 He C T8 2 Hx 3 In the Type field click the Pulse Output circle In the Base Frequency field click the circle of the appropriate selec tion For pulse output types selections include 4882 81 Hz 9765 63 Hz 78 125 Hz or 156 250 Hz This selection determines the pulse width coefficient Enter the tag name or nickname the Tag Name field Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field This is the operand used to generate pulse outputs Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 151 Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate the 8 P pulse instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the pulse instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button The pulse output PULS instruction is used to generate pulse outputs of 9 574 through 13020 8 Hz which can be used to control pulse motors for simple posi tion control applications The output pulse ratio is fixed at 50 The PULS and PWM instructions can be used on transistor output type Micro or Micro C base units only
8. R 000 063 000 031 Accept the default Set in the Type field Then enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Next enter the appropriate operand in the Allocation Number field Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the SET instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the SET instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 18 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Basic Instructions Reset RST Selecting Basic Instructions gt Reset RST displays the Reset RST dialog box You may also click the toolbar button ex Pirner AST 23 C Hal T te y OK Cancel Help NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option Use the Reset RST instruction to reset or turn off outputs internal relays and shift register bits The RST instruction requires one address which must be selected from the appropriate op
9. Operand Symbolic Total Points Adding Counter C000 C044 45 Input 1000 1017 16 Internal Relay M000 M197 160 Output Q000 Q005 0010 0017 14 Reversible Counter C045 C046 2 Shift Register R000 R127 128 Single Output 0 95 96 Special Internal Relay M200 M297 M300 M317 96 Timer T000 T097 80 NOTE Outputs Q006 Q007 two points cannot be used Outputs 0010 0015 six points can be used with the expansion unit Outputs 0010 0017 eight points can be used with the serial module Special internal relays M200 M287 are used for key matrix operations 2001 APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS A1 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Micro 1 Special Internal Relays Special internal relays are used to control certain conditions in the Micro 1 pro cessor In some cases the special relays may be set after designating a value for a specified internal function or may be assigned after execution of the ladder logic program The following defines each of the Micro 1 PLC s special internal relays Symbolic Numeric M200 M277 600 677 Description Sets the key matrix input on off statuses This is a read only register 280 287 680 687 Sets the key matrix scan output This is a read only register M290 690 Sets the short pulse input status This internal relay holds the short pulse input status Any short pulse input an in
10. 52 D20 51 D10 CMP2 DI REP MO 52 D20 CMP2 51 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 89 When only S1 source is designated with a repeat as many double word oper ands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by 1 are compared with the double word operand designated by S2 The comparison results are ANDed and set to the operand designated by D1 CMP2 SIR 52 D1 REP D20 D30 M50 3 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 D20 D21 D30 D31 3 D22 D23 D30 D31 AND M50 D24 D25 D30 D31 When only S2 source is designated with a repeat the double word operand designated by S1 is compared with as many double word operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S2 The comparison results are ANDed and set to the operand designated by D1 CMP2 651 S2R DI REP D D20 D30 M50 3 S1 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 020 021 030 031 3 D20 D21 D32 D33 AND M50 D20 D21 D34 D35 3 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 90 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When S1 source and S2 source are designated with repeats as many double word operands as repeat cycles starting with the operands designated by 51 and 52 are compared with each other The comparison results ANDed and set to the operand designated by D1
11. D488 RTS control signal option When group 2 is enabled as the expansion control data registers D488 is used to control the Request to Send RTS signal to indicate the Micro C transmitting receiving status or operating status The RTS control signal option can be used only in the user protocol to commu nicate through the loader port D48870 While the Micro C is transmitting data RTS remains off While the Micro C is not transmitting data RIS is turned on Use this option when a remote terminal operates in the half duplex mode since RTS goes on or off according to the transmit data from the D488 0 is the system default APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 2001 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 1 31 passe While the Micro C is transmitting data RTS is turned on While the Micro C is not transmitting data RTS remains off Use this option when a remote terminal operates the half duplex mode since RTS goes on or off according to the transmit data from the Micro C Dabo While the Micro C is running RTS is on whether the Micro C is transmitting or receiving data While the Micro C is stopped RTS remains off Use this option to indicate the operating status D488 3 RTS remains off DASE 59 While the can receive data RTS is turned on Use this option when flow control of receive data is required 0
12. Operand S1 S2 D1 Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1 0 35 0 35 Q 0 31 0 31 0 31 M 0 317 0 317 0 287 T 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 R 0 63 0 63 D Micro 0 99 0 99 D 0 498 0 498 Micro C 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 82 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Constant 0 65535 0 65535 E Repeat 1 31 1 31 1 31 When timer or counter is designated as 51 or 52 the current value of the timer counter is read out Maintaining the Comparison Output If the input to the comparison instruction is off then the comparison output is maintained If the comparison output is on then the on status is maintained when the input is turned off The following examples show how the programs maintain or clear the output when the input is turned off Examples CMP gt This program maintains the comparison output status when the input is off H 10 Comparison Result CMPs 51 D10 52 10 D1 REP 00 ON Input 10 OFF D10 lt Cl D10 lt Cl ON Comparison Output Q0 OFF 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 83 This program turns the output off when the input is off P gt SI D10 ON Input IO OFF 52 D1 REP MO 0 10 lt Comparison Result C1 Comparison
13. Analog Output Module device which converts a digital signal from the processor into an analog output signal for control of a user s field device Analog Digital A D A device that changes a variable analog signal into Converter a digital signal AND A logical operation which has the property such that if X and Y are two logic inputs then the single output of X and Y is only ON when both X and Y are ON as shown below 0 off 1 X Y X amp Y 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Annunciator A visual device consisting of a number of pilot lights or buzzers Each light or buzzer indicates the condition which exists or existed in an associated circuit ANSI Abbr American National Standards Associations Apparent Power Apparent power is the combination of reactive power and active power Application Program PLC or computer program that accomplishes specific tacks Arithmetic Capability ability to do arithmetic functions such as addition subtraction multiplication and division with the processor Armature The laminated iron core with wire wound around it in which electromotive force a is produced by magnetic induction in a motor or generator usu ally a revolving part but in AC machines motors often stationary Array An arrangement of elements in one or more dimensions ASA Abbr American Standard Association
14. rm om a Po NOTE The default is 10msec 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 18 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL HSC FA1J and FA2J only The High Speed Counter dialog box allows you to choose the HSC type HSC2 or HSC3 and to assign the first input address 110 120 or 130 respectively ey mre rm er aie mon EXC am p ma p jh aras Micro Micro C and ONC Function Area Settings field descriptions Clicking an option selects it To deselect the 5 Click the appropriate PLC settings as described in the following option click again to delete the mark Once the appropriate ladder preferences have been selected click the OK button To back out of this option without changing any preferences click the Cancel button To access on line help press the Help button To return to the default settings for the PLC click the Default but ton at any time 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 19 Run Stop This option stops and starts operation of the PLC r 1 Fe LA Vw dee Lech uir d Stop Input When the Stop Input box is checked a designated input is needed to turn the PLC operation on off To turn the stop input off remove the check to the left of the Stop Input option NOTE Once inputs are entered they will display in terms of 1
15. zd Lm ro dx cig ese MICEC ii Ea all gt TtM FE PIP E Tt eh or E a I 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Configure gt PLC Selection Selecting the PLC Selection option from the Configure menu allows you to select a PLC for which your current ladder file is to be programmed MI 1 dali OE MEE MORS al EUR POE EET A IRI ol eT Bie SEA gt n M LIES 0o _ TEE T I 58 Pi Wi Click the appropriate PLC to select it Pressing the Use as Default button sets the highlighted PLC as the format for new ladder files and for the PLC at start up To configure the selected PLC press the Configure button Once the appropriate PLC has been selected and configured click the OK button To back out of this option without any changes click the Cancel button To access on line help press the Help button 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 3 Micro 1 Configuration If the Micro 1 is highlighted when the Configure button is pressed the follow ing dialog box displays bapaan PERU HENT T m haak ilr St bee Lip s lera las En cand METELLI Expansion Click the diamond next to the appropriate expansion unit T
16. Base Frequency 156 250 Hz Pulse Width Coefficient S1 Output Frequency x 2 156250 Pulse Width Coefficient S1 6 1000 x 2 Pulse Width Coefficient 51 72 125 Pulse width coefficient 72 should be used as source operand S1 PULS 51 MODE4 72 10 When input 10 is on output QO generates pulse outputs of 1001 6 Hz 156250 Output Frequency 6 7246 x2 Example Pulse Motor Speed Control Using PULS Instruction This example demonstrates a program to control the rotating speed of a pulse motor using the PULS instruction Analog potentiometer 0 is used to change the pulse motor speed When input IO is on the pulse output is generated to rotate the pulse motor When input I1 is on the pulse motor rotates in the reverse direction 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 155 Operands lo Input to execute the PULS instruction and start the pulse motor n Input to reverse the pulse motor rotation Qo Pulse output Q1 Output to change the pulse motor rotation D10 Pulse width coefficient MODE1 9 574 through 406 901 Hz PULS S1 MODEI D10 QI M317 is the in operation output special internal relay which remains on while the program is executed The analog read 0 ANRO instruction sets the value of analog potentiometer 0 to data register D10 While input 10 is on the PULS instruction is executed to generate output pulses
17. CMP2 SIR S2R D1 REP B D20 D30 M50 3 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 020 021 D30 D31 3 D22 D23 032 033 AND M50 D24 D25 D34 D35 When S1 source and D1 destination are designated with repeats as many double word operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S1 are compared with the double word operand designated by 52 The compar ison results are set to as many operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by DI CMP2 SIR S2 DIR REP I D20 D30 M50 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 D20 D21 D30 D31 M50 D22 D23 D30 D31 M51 D24 D25 030 031 52 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 91 When 52 source and D1 destination are designated with repeats the double word operand designated by S1 is compared with as many double word operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by 52 The comparison results are set to as many operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand des ignated by D1 2 651 S2R DIR REP 15 D20 D30 M50 3 S1 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 020 021 030 031 50 020 021 032 033 M51 020 021 034 035 52 When 51 52 source and D1 destination are designated with repeat double word operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operands desig nated by S1 and 52 are com
18. Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the OUTN instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the OUTN instruc tion click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 16 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Basic Instructions Set SET Selecting Basic Instructions gt Set SET displays the Set SET dialog box You may also click the toolbar button G EST Trp lag Hane 7 Bats C Fal H dd a lag Hame i Barn 1 l 3 Help NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option Use the Set SET instruction to set or turn on outputs internal relays and shift register bits The SET instruction requires one address which must be selected from the appropriate operand numbers The same output can be set and reset many times within a program SET instructions operate in every scan while the input is on The following chart provides all SET operands 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 17 Instruction Standard High Speed l n NS Q 000 031 000 011 M 000 287 000 047
19. 2000 IDEC CORPORATION instructions 9 78 output maintaining 9 82 repeat operation 9 84 Comparison CMP ladder diagram 9 81 9 82 Compile menu 7 1 Convert Ladder option 7 2 Show Errors option 7 3 Computer Interface G 10 Conditional Jump G 10 configuration FA Series 6 5 FAI 6 5 FA2 6 5 FA3S 6 5 Micro 1 6 3 Micro3 6 4 Micro3C 6 4 MicroSmart 6 7 Configure menu 6 1 Communications Settings option 6 35 Function Area Settings option 6 8 Ladder Preferences option 6 37 PLC Selection option 6 2 Constant Character dialog box 9 202 9 203 9 205 10 5 context sensitive help 9 3 context sensitive right mouse button 1 2 Convert Ladder option 7 2 Error Message dialog box 7 2 errors 7 3 Ladder to Mnemonic Conversion dialog box 7 2 Copy 2 5 G 10 Copy option 4 2 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX V Core Memory G 10 Counter G 10 Counter CNT 9 6 Counter Comparison instructions 9 39 ladder diagram 9 41 Counter Comparison Equal CC 9 6 Counter Comparison Greater Than or Equal CC gt 9 6 Counter instruction 9 26 counters 9 166 table 9 28 cover page option 3 6 Cross Reference 1 2 Cross Reference option 3 6 CRT Terminal G 10 CUBIQ shortcuts 1 6 CUD instruction 9 26 Current Loop G 11 Cursor G 11 Cut 2 5 Cut option 4 2 Cycle G 11 D Daisy Chain G 11 Data G 11 Data Link G 11 Data Processing G 11 data register allocation numbers 1 21 Data Set G 11 D
20. Catch Input Micro Used for short input signals this option causes the program to catch an input transition before the end of a program scan aet prm quias gu a BU eyes TE 1 1 3 patera Ji Fora Freiin Lai 21 y 2 Select the Up option ON pulse rising also the default when an input switches from OFF to ON Select the Dn option OFF pulse falling edge when an input changes from ON to OFF NOTE For the ONC please refer to the ONC Function Area Settings section of this chapter You can also refer to the ONC Hardware Manual 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 24 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Catch inputs are divided into four groups Catch Group Input Number G1 10 G2 12 and G4 14 17 16 and 24 I O Micro and Micro C base units I4 and I5 10 I O Micro base units Input Filter The Input Filter Time Selection option causes the program to read input trans actions after the defined wait time For example accepting the default setting of 3 msec causes the PLC to read an ON setting for an input only if it remains on for more than 3 msec aet pp req omes Ram rm mes XIII it 9 ke MD 3 katir fe a 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 25
21. If the input to the A D converter unit exceeds the input range then an overflow occurs Additionally when the resolution is set to 8 bits 250 is set When the resolution is set to 12 bits 4000 is set A D D1 08 D20 12 When input 12 is the analog data from the A C converter unit is converted to a digital value with an 8 bit resolution and set to data register D20 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions High Speed Counter Selecting Advanced Instructions gt High speed Counter gt accesses a sub menu of instructions Single stage Comparison HSCO Multi stage Comparison HSC1 Pulse Output Control HSC2 and Gate Control HSC3 NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure 3 PLC Selection option 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 166 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Introduction to Counters The Micro and Micro C feature high speed counter functions which can be used for position control by counting high speed pulses or for simple motor con trol in combination with the pulse output This function can also be used in combination with a pulse generator to measure lengths or widths of objects The ordinary counter instruction counts only one pulse in one scan and the counting speed depends on the scan time The high speed counter ca
22. WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 31 Static Non moving electrical charge such as on the plates of a capacitor Status The ON or OFF condition of the referenced device Storage Synonymous with MEMORY Surge Suppressor A series RC network attached to an I 0 module for the purpose of limiting the electrical noise gen erated by inductive loads connected via hard con tacts Typically wired in parallel with the inductive load Synchronous Shift A shift register which uses a clock for timing of a Register system operation and where only one 1 state change per clock pulse Synchronous Having a constant time interval between successive Transmission bits characters or words Table A collection of data each item being uniquely identified either by some label or by it s relative position Tape Reader A unit which is capable of sensing data punched tape 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 32 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Teletype A registered trademark of a type of printer terminal and tape reader which was originally manufac tured by the TELETYPE CORP Terminal Any fitting attached to a circuit or device for the convenience in making electrical connections Terminator A hardware load employed on the end of a trans mission line or cable used to balance the imped ance Thumb Wheel Switch rotating switch used to input numerical BCD information to the programmable logic
23. determined by the value of D10 Output QO sends out the output pulses When input I1 is on output 1 is turned on to reverse the pulse motor 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 156 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL VO Wiring Diagram PULS Pulse Width Modulation PWM Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Pulse and A D Conversion gt Pulse Width Modulation PWM displays the Pulse Width Modulation PWM dialog box PULS You may also click the toolbar button 22 Parker Wirth Pb Trav D Pulse Pulge Micki bation x l aba Lyra aneri Taq Hares Canmi S12 me 35 6 rme 032 C H meee 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 157 option 5 In the Type field click circle to the left of the Pulse Modulation In the Base Frequency field click the circle of the appropriate selec tion For pulse modulation types selections include 51 2 msec 25 6 msec 3 2 msec or 1 6 msec This figure notes the base fre quency for which calculations will be performed Enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is comple
24. on with a delay as shown below Pulse Input IO o Current Value ien PEE Dd Nee oN 300 msec Maximum Comparison Result ON Internal Relay OFE Next Scan END Execution 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 182 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Example HSC1 This example demonstrates a three stage high speed counter operation using the instruction MOV 51 D1 REP 0 D11 ee MOV 51 D1 REP 10000 D12 oe MOV 51 D1 REP 200 D13 S MOV 51 D1 REP 0 D14 ee MOV 51 D1 REP 50000 015 4 MOV 51 D1 REP 201 D16 oe MOV 51 D1 REP 1 D17 is MOV 51 D1 REP 34464 D18 ee MOV 51 D1 REP 202 D19 HSC1 51 HIGH D10 M301 is the initialize pulse special internal relay used to execute the move MOV instruction at startup 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 183 The MOV instructions set data to data registers D10 D19 gt Quantity of preset stages gt lst stage preset upper digits 123 10 000 gt st stage preset lower digits lst stage output 200 output QO gt 2nd stage preset upper digits 50 000 gt 2nd stage preset lower digits gt 2nd stage output 201 output Q1 Nth stage preset upper digits 100 000 gt Nth stage preset lower digits Nth stage output 202 output Q2
25. 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 2000 IDEC CORPORATION
26. 4 8 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Use the following charts for the functions and definitions of the various options available within the Tag Name Editor dialog box Function Keys within the Tag Name Editor Close Exits the Tag Name Editor and returns you to the main win V Close dow Upon exiting the Tag Name Editor any changes made will be saved Refresh If changes to the ladder are made this option refreshes data in the editor All editor changes immediately update the lad s der Changes include tag names allocation numbers and tag name comments z 5 Creates a new tag name This button allows you to create all necessary tag names and assign allocation numbers and tag name comments to these tag names Delete Deletes the currently selected highlighted tag name The X Delete changes are immediately adjusted in the ladder window Access the On Line Help page for the editor Allows you to move to previous coils that have the same tag name With this option you can see if more than one coil has the same tag name Allows you to move to the next coil that has the same tag E name With this option you can see if more than one coil has the same tag name 4 EDIT MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 4 9 Field Descriptions within the Tag Name Editor Operand Type To specify the operand type click the diamond next to the appropr
27. 8 26 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 1 9 EDITING THE LADDER Using your right mouse button it is possible to perform all the operations neces sary to edit your ladder file To access these instructions click your right mouse button within the area of your ladder file in which you wish to insert or edit The initial menu of right mouse button features displays Hes ba Lass Ure LiH LA Laie LI En lt 21 irasban hued h a 1 25 Furs Select menu items and sub menus by moving the mouse to highlight the desired topics and then clicking the mouse to select Selecting an individual topic will either immediately perform the indicated action or will display the correspond ing dialog box Selecting a sub menu denoted by an gt arrow to the right of the item displays the next menu NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC first select the PLC using the Configure gt PLC Selection option 2001 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse gt Edit rung comment Selecting the Edit rung comment instruction with the right mouse button allows you to edit
28. S2 and the destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the operand range a user program execution error will result turning special internal relay M304 and error indicator on When a bit operand such as an input output internal relay or shift register is used as the source or destination 16 points are used When a repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 point increments Source operand S2 and destination operand D2 do not have to be designated If S2 or D2 is not designated the source or destination operand is determined by S1 or D1 without offset 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 73 Example IMOV D20 C10 D10 D25 51 52 D2 REP D20 C10 gt D10 D25 Source operand 51 and destination operand D1 determine the type of operand Source operand S2 and destination operand D2 are the offset values to determine the source and destination operands If the current value of counter C10 designated by source operand S2 is 4 then the data is determined by adding the offset to data register D20 designated by source operand S1 D 20 4 D24 If data register D25 contains a value of 20 then the destina tion is determined by adding the offset to data register D10 designated by destination operand D1 D 10 20 D30
29. WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 2001 IDEC Corporation All rights reserved Produced and printed in the United States of America Important Information While every effort has been made to ensure that the information contained within this document is accurate under no circumstances shall IDEC Corpora tion be held liable or responsible for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use of or the application of IDEC PLC components individually or in combination with other equipment In line with our policy of continuous improvement we reserve the right to make product changes without notice All persons using these components must be willing to accept responsibility for choosing the correct component to suit their application and for choosing an application appropriate for the component individually or in combination with other equipment All diagrams and examples in this manual are for illustrative purposes only In no way does the inclusion of these diagrams and examples in this manual constitute a guarantee as to their suitability for any specific application To test and approve all programs prior to installation is the responsibility of the end user 2001 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL By using IDEC Corporation software product you are consenting to be bound by the IDEC Corporation software end user license agreement included as a part of this package If you do not agr
30. When an RXD instruction without an end delimiter is executed data receiving ends when the specified bytes of the data in the receive format such as data regis ters and skips have been received In addition data receiving ends when the interval between the incoming data characters exceeds the receive time out value specified in the FUNS loader port communication mode setting whether the RXD has an end delimiter or not 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 28 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The character interval timer is started when the first character of incoming com munication is received and restarted each time the next character is received When a character is not received after a predetermined time a time out occurs and the RXD ends the data receive operation Skip When a skip is designated in the receive format a specified quantity of digits in the incoming data are skipped and thus not stored to data registers maxi mum of 99 digits bytes of characters can be skipped continuously Example An RXD instruction with a two digit skip starts at the third byte is executed Incoming data 2 3 EP 6 7 8 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 37h 38h Skipped D102 0035h D103 0036h D104 0037h D105 0038h If D100 is designated as the first data register D100 0031h D101 0032h 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC
31. When input IO is turned on the move MOV instruction sets 0 to data register DO If the current values of counters CO C10 are 10 20 30 and 40 respectively then the ADD instruction with four repeat cycles totals the current value as follows CO 10 DO 0 gt 00 10 20 DO 10 gt D0 30 C2 30 DO 30 gt D0 60 C3 40 DO 60 gt D0 100 Data register DO stores the final result of 100 Example SUB This example demonstrates the use special internal relay M303 to process a bor row flag SUB 51 D12 52 7000 D1 REP D12 di M303 D12 7000 gt D12 Process borrowing so that the number of times a borrow occurs is subtracted from D13 When a borrow occurs D13 is decremented by one 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 98 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Example MUL D10 D20 D30 ii MUL 51 52 D1 REP D10 x D20 gt D30 When input I1 is on the data of D10 is multiplied by the data of D20 The result is set to D30 NOTE When the result exceeds 65535 special internal relay M304 pro gram execution error is turned on and error indicator is lit Example DIV DIV 51 52 D1 REP D10 D20 D30 i D10 D20 gt D3O quotient D31 remainder When input I2 is on data of D10 is divided by data of D20 The quotient is set to D30 and the remainder is set to D31 NOTE The destination uses two word operands so do
32. When the D1 destination data exceeds 65535 as a result of addition a carry occurs and special internal relay M303 is turned on When the D1 data is less than zero as a result of subtraction a borrow occurs and special internal relay M303 is turned on There are three ways to program the carrying process see examples below If a carry never goes on then the program does not have to include internal relay M303 to process carrying If a carry goes on unexpectedly then an output can be programmed to be set as a warning indicator If a carry goes on expectedly then the number of times a carry occurs can be added and used as one word data in a specified register 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 96 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Example ADD This example demonstrates the use of a carry flag from special internal relay M303 to set an alarm signal ADD 51 52 D2 500 D1 REP D2 10 M303 Acknowledge PB RST D2 500 gt D2 When carry occurs output is set as a warning indicator When the acknowledge PB is pressed the warning indicator is reset Example Repeat Operation Using ADD This example demonstrates the use of the repeat operation to total the current values of four counters using the ADD instruction 4 52 DO D1 DO ADD S1 R CO 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL
33. 0 D490 0 APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 2001 APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES General Error Codes Error data for the Micro 1 can be checked in the Online gt PLC Status dialog box in WindLDR PLC error codes for the Micro or Micro C may be registered on the PLC program loader or in the PLC Status dialog box in WindLDR When reading error data using FUN20 the error code is displayed using one two or three digits in hexadecimal notation 0 F These hexadecimal codes consist of four items each in the first and second digits and two items in the third digit Each digit of the error code indicates a different set of conditions requiring attention Each error code display indicates that the error marked with X has occurred Two or more marks indicate that multiple errors have occurred at the same time If any of the conditions from the First Digit Error Code chart on page A3 2 exist digit on the left then this digit displays on the program loader If conditions from both the First Digit Error Code chart or the Second Digit Error Code chart on page A3 3 exist then these two digits display For example the error code may read out 21 This indicates two conditions requiring attention User program sum check error from the Second Digit Error Code chart and Power failure from the Third Digit Error Code chart If the read out displays D then this indicates three c
34. 1 to 31 2 Tuesday D 3 Day of week 3 Wednesday 0 to 6 assigned 4 Thursday as follows 5 Friday 6 Saturday 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 126 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL NOTE Only the months of January March May July August October and Decem ber can be programmed with a date of the 31st The month of February can be programmed with a date of the 29th only for actual leap years Leap years are automatically adjusted NOTE If the month day or day of the week is assigned a value which is not within the range specified above or if a date is not assigned according to the preceding note then invalid data will result in a user program execution error Internal relay M304 turns on and the ERRI indicator on the Micro or Micro C base unit also turns on The error code is stored in data register D93 when the con trol data register is enabled using FUN10 Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Function Source to write the calendar data Operand D 0 99 for Micro 0 498 for Micro C Since the CALW instruction is executed at the rising edge of the input a pulse input from an SOTU or SOTD instruction is not required 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 127 Example CALW D1 REP D40 mm MOV 81 94 M301 MOV 51 D1 REP 20 D42 a M301 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When t
35. CNT Current values are held pulse inputs are turned off count out statuses held SFR Shift register bit statuses are held pulse inputs are turned off the output from the last bit is held 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 47 e Input conditions cannot be set for the JEND instruction than one JMP instruction can be used with one JEND instruction e Corresponding JMP JEND instructions cannot be nested within another pair of corresponding JMP JEND instructions Jump JMP and Jump End JEND In the above example when input 10 is on JMP is executed so that the subse quent output status is held When input 10 is off JMP is not executed so that subsequent programs exe cuted according to the actual input statuses 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 48 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Example Jump JMP and Jump End JEND This jump circuit will give corresponding priority to I1 13 and I5 When input is on the first JMP is executed so that the subsequent output sta tuses of QO through Q2 are held When input is off the first JMP is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of I2 though I6 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 49 When is off and 13 is the second JMP is executed so that the subsequent outp
36. Cd Ld Lame dx cta Miche il T UFU ial m ai tac ate 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 4 EDIT MENU 4 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Edit gt Undo Selecting the Undo option from the Edit menu reverses the last editing action Additionally WindLDR allows multiple undos Each time Undo is selected the previous chronological action is reversed Nevertheless once a ladder file is saved the Undo option is no longer available You may also click the toolbar button al Additionally when the Undo option is selected from the File menu the nature of the command which will be reversed displays Edit gt Cut Copy Paste Selecting the Cut Copy or Paste options from the Edit menu allows you to cut copy or paste a coil ladder line rung or multiple rungs into the ladder file You may also click the toolbar buttons Cut Copy Paste NOTE You may also use the keyboard to Cut Copy and Paste Use CONTROL X to Cut CONTROL C to Copy and CONTROL V to Paste 4 EDIT MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 4 3 Edit Select Rung Select All This option allows you to select a particular rung or all the rungs of a ladder file in order to Cut Copy or Paste Edit gt Find Selecting the Find option from the Edit menu allows you to search for tag names allocation num
37. Once inputs are entered they will display in terms of 1000 For example enter ing input 2 12 will display as 10002 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 10 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL If the Default button is pressed this and all other corresponding options turn off In other words all settings will revert back to the original defaults If an invalid stop input number is entered an error message will display A valid input number must be entered or the invalid number erased Reset input No setting This option resets the operation of the PLC when the designated input terminal is activated The program operation will restart if the input goes off while the start input is on When the reset input is turned ON the reset input has priority over the stop input To activate the Reset input No setting click the box to the left of Enable reset input to display a check mark Then in the Input number field enter the desired input number An enable reset input number have a value from 10 to I17 for Micro 1 IO to 1317 for FA Series CP12 and CP13 and 10 to 1157 for the rest of the FA Series Input numbers I8 and I9 are not valid NOTE Once inputs are entered they will display in terms of 1000 For example enter ing input 2 I2 will display as 10002 WARNING If the Default button is pressed this and all other corresponding options turn off In other words all settings will revert back to the ori
38. Soft Filter The soft filter divided into four groups refers to the software dependent time filters This allows you some flexibility to define different input wait times for different inputs Select among four wait time spans for each group 0 3 7 or 10 msec Soft Group Input Number G1 10 G2 I2 and G4 14 through I7 Hard Filter The hard filter refers to the hardware dependent time filters This allows you to choose a separate time delay for the PLC hardware Using the up and down arrow scroll bars select a time delay from 0 to 255 msec The default setting is 10 msec 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 26 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Communication Use the Communication Device Number field to allocate a device number 1 to 31 to each of the Micro or Micro C PLCs connected a 1 N communication computer link system p acm qain aea 1 tva ee met t fer m TL x a rd NOTE This option is only applicable when there is more than one PLC connected to your PC Click the up and down arrow scroll bars to select the desired device number If the Default button is pressed this option resets to 0 Communication Format Selection Select between the default communications mode settings and optional settings The communication mode settings determine how the PLC and PC will commu
39. the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat If the selected condition is true then this operand will turn on If the selected condition is not true then the operand will turn off Optionally enter any associated comment in the lower tag name comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines If Repeat is selected enter the number of repeats in the REP field Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the CMP instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the CMP instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 81 NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse but ton instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option S1 S2 gt D1 on H CMP SI R S2 R DI R REP When an input is on 16 bit word data designated by source operands 51 and S2 are compared When 1 data is evaluated to be true to S2 data destination oper and D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode
40. 00h FFh E Repeat 0 99 The receive format designated by operand S1 can be a maximum of 200 bytes When data is completely received the output or internal relay designated by operand D1 is turned on Destination 2 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the operand designated by D2 The receive status data register designated by D2 stores the status of the data received and the error code The next data register stores the byte count of received data The same data registers cannot be used as both trans mit status data registers for TXD instructions and receive status data registers for RXD instructions If the same data register numbers are programmed as status data registers for TXD and RXD instructions syntax error 80 will result Precautions for Programming RXD Instruction Micro C can execute a maximum of five RXD instructions that have start delimiter at the same time Ifa start delimiter is not programmed in RXD instructions then the Micro C can execute only one receive instruc tion at a time If the start input for an RXD instruction is turned on while another RXD instruction without a start delimiter is executed then a user communication error occurs 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 21 e Since instructions are executed in each scan while an input is on a pulse input from an SOTU or SOTD instr
41. 0484 0485 Not available D495 D496 See 0484 0485 Not available D498 D499 Reserved to Not available enable or disable expan sion control data register service NOTE When FUNIO is set to enable control data registers selected data registers D90 through D99 work as control data registers others can be used as ordinary data registers For details of the data link function see the Micro Users Manual APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 0 1004 B Om Cfo Ife JWa eh WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A1 23 Micro C Expansion Control Data Registers Data registers D484 through 10499 are allocated as expansion control data regis ters D499 is used to enable or disable expansion control data register service for D484 through D498 divided into group 0 through 3 The data registers in the group which are disabled for expansion control data registers can be used as ordi nary data registers D499 cannot be used as an ordinary data register and must not be programmed to store the data of operation results Group Expansion Control Description Data Register D499 Expansion control data register service selection 0 D498 Day calendar D497 Month calendar D496 Year calendar 1 D495 Modem mode selection D494 Reserved D493 Modem mode status D492 Protocol selection in modem mode 2 D491 Control signal status D490 DSR control signal option available only for communica
42. 12 bits do not take effect Group O D498 Day calendar D497 Month calendar D496 Year calendar When group 0 is enabled as an expansion control data register the calendar data is stored to D496 through D498 The year is indicated with the lower two digits Group 1 D495 Modem mode selection When group 1 is enabled as expansion control data registers and 1 is entered for D495 the modem mode is enabled When 0 is entered for 10495 the modem mode is disabled D494 Reserved D493 Modem mode status When the modem mode is enabled see above D493 stores a modem mode status D493 Value Description Remarks 30h AT command AT command start IR is completed normally completed normally 31h Issuing AT command 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 1 26 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 32h AT command See the result code stored in data execution error registers D104 D119 Check the modem power modem cable and the remote modem 33h Two or more start IRs Correct the program so that only are on one start IR goes on at a time 34h Modem mode enabled 35h Start IR program error Correct the program so that only the disconnect command is issued while the line is connected 36h Reserved 37h Reserved 38h Retrying AT command 39h AT command Correct the program to include program error ODh in the AT command D492 Protocol selec
43. Advanced Instructions gt Interface gt Display DISP displays the Display DISD dialog box You may also click the toolbar button a SI Tay Hume vato Allaceh P T Tay Hane In the DISP field click the circle of the appropriate selection either BCD for binary coded decimal conversion or BIN for binary con version Enter the quantity of digits to display on the interface in the white field below Enter the appropriate tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field The data in S1 is the source operand The data Q is the des tination operand 2001 1 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 138 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field below This is the operand from which data will be moved Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines In the LAT field click the circle of the appropriate selection either Low for a low latch phase or High for a high latch phase In the DAT field click the circle of the appropriate selection either Low for a low data phase or High for a high data phase Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate the display instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the display in
44. As a result when input 10 is on the data in data register D24 is moved to data register D30 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 74 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Advanced Instructions Move Indirect Move Not IMOVN Selecting Advanced Instructions29Move2Indirect Move Not IMOVN dis plays the Indirect Move Not IMOVN dialog box Trac 51 32 Di DE V Miren z pnt Tiri st Jnana D D Apra EN T 3 Accept the default Indirect Move Not in the Type field Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper S1 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below This is the first operand from which data will be inverted and moved Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper S2 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below This is the amount of the offset from which data will be inverted and moved Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper D1 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below This is the first operand 7o which data will be inverted and moved Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 75 Enter the tag name or nickname in the uppe
45. Base S2 Offset D1 Base D2 Offset addressto for S1 address to for D1 move move to from l 0 35 0 35 0 35 Q 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 317 0 287 0 287 0 287 T 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 R 0 63 0 63 0 63 0 63 D Micro 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 99 D 0 498 0 498 0 498 0 498 Micro C Constant m gt x Repeat 1 31 1 31 NOTE When using the high speed processing mode possible operands are limited When a timer T or counter C is designated as S1 S2 or D2 the operand data is the timer counter current value When T or C is designated as D1 the operand data is the timer counter preset value which can be 0 through 9999 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 77 Make sure that the source data determined by S1 S2 and the destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the operand range a user program execution error will result turning special internal relay M304 and error indicator on When a bit operand such as an input output internal relay or shift register is used as the source or destination 16 points are used When a repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 point increments Do not designate both source operand 52 and destination operand D2 An error occurs if both are designated If S2
46. Basic Instructions gt Single Output gt Single Output Down SOTD displays the SOTD icon within the selected area of the ladder The selected area appears as a shaded gray square To select the SOTD instruction you may also click the toolbar button The SOTU displays by selecting the Single Output Up instruction with the right mouse button The SOTD instruction displays by selecting the Single Output Down instruction with the right mouse button NOTE When using the Micro 1 only the SOT option is available The SOT option is the same as the SOTU option The SOTD option is not available with the Micro 1 The Single Output Up SOTU instruction looks for the transition of a given input from off to on The Single Output Down SOTD instruction looks for the transition of a given input from on to off 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 21 There is not limit to the number of SOTU and SOTD instructions that can be in a program NOTE If an operation starts while the given input is already on the SOTU output will not turn on The transition from off to on is what triggers the SOTU instruction When a relay is defined as the SOTU or SOTD output it may not operate if the scan time is not compatible with relay requirements NOTE for MCS instructions If input 12 to the SOTU instruction turns on while input to the Master Control Set MCS i
47. Chapter 4 Edit Menu See ed eh wd Aisa yee dale de gen dens 4 1 Edit Undo 4 2 Edit Cut Copy Paste 4 2 Edit Select Rung Select AII 4 3 Edit Find 4 3 Edit Insert Append Delete 4 4 Edit Coil 4 5 Edit Edit Rung Comment 4 6 Edit Tag Name Editor 4 7 Function Keys within the Tag Name Editor 4 8 Field Descriptions within the Tag Name Editor 4 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL I Chapter 5 View Men sired MI EP tiie 5 1 View 3 Tool Bar 5 1 View Status Bar 5 2 Tip Messages 5 2 Chapter 6 Configure Menusi ee Riek aries Rule dr d xU Rule 6 1 Configure PLC Selection 6 2 Micro 1 Configuration 6 3 Micro Configuration and Micro C Configuration 6 4 FA Series Controller Configuration 6 5 Open Net Controller Configuration 6 6 MicroSmart Controller Configuration 6 7 Configure Function Area Settings 6 8 Micro 1 FA1 FA2 FA3S CP11 11T CP12 13 Function Area Settings 6 9 Micro Micro C and ONC Function Area Settings 6 18 ONC Function Area Settings 6 32 MicroSmart Function Area Settings 6 34 Configure Communication Settings 6 35 Configure Ladder preferences 6 37 Chapter 7 Compile Decimo FI EVER bino 7 1 Compile Convert Ladder 7 2 Compile Show Errors 7 3 2001 IDEC CORPORATION TABLE OF CONTENTS IV WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Chapter 8 Online Menu e
48. Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate the clock calendar instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruc tion without utilizing the clock calendar instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse but ton instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option Calendar Read CALR TET When an input is on calendar data year month day and day of week is read to four data registers starting with the designated operand 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 125 Year 0 to 99 D 1 Month 1 to 12 Sunday D 2 Day 1 to 31 Monday D 3 Day of week 0 to 6 assigned as follows Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday oO A OIN Saturday Calendar Write CALW 2H 24 When input is turned on the calendar is set using data stored four data reg isters starting with the designated operand D Year 0 to 99 Sunday 0 1 Month 1 to 12 1 Monday D 2 Day
49. GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 5 ASCII Abbr American Standards Code for Information Interchanges This is the code whereby E 8 bit configurations are defined for all alpha numeric characters Assembly Language computer language that has one to one corre spondence with an assembly program The assem bly program directs a computer to operate program in symbolic language i e FORTRAN to produce a program in machine language Asynchronous Shift A shift register which is loaded and shifted only at Register data entry no clock is required Asynchronous A mode of data transmission where each character Transmission is preceded by a start bit and is terminated with a stop bit Automatic Reset To automatically return a device to the 0 or off state after a given period of time or condition Auxiliary Contacts In a switching device contacts in addition to the main circuit contacts which function with the movement of the latter Bandwidth The frequency range in which the magnitude of the system gain expressed in db is within the 3 db band 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 6 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Baud A unit of data transmission typically bits per sec ond Baud Rate Synonymous with signal events bits per second and used as a measure of serial data flow between a computer and or communication BCD Binary Coded A notation system that re
50. NOTE When using these operands the high speed processing mode possibilities are limited When a timer or counter C is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T or C is used as D1 the data is written as a preset value which can be 0 through 9999 When a bit operand such as an input output internal relay or shift register is used as the source or destination 16 points are used When a repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 point increments 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 60 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Examples MOV 8102 02 DO MOV 51 D1 REP 10 810 D2 When input 10 is on constant 810 designated by 51 is moved to data register D2 designated by D1 D10 gt D2 When input is on the data in data register D10 desig nated by S1 is moved to data register D2 designated by D1 51 D1 D10 D2 S D10 gt MO When input 12 is on the data in data register D10 designated by 51 is moved to 16 internal relays starting with 0 designated by D1 0 7 MOV S1 DI REP D10 12345 M10 M17 D10 MO The data in the source data register is converted into 16 bit binary data The on off statuses of the 16 bits are moved to internal relays MO through M7 and M10 through M17 MO is the least significant bit LSB and M17 is the most signifi cant bit MSB 9 E
51. Operating Cleared Input 14 M295 Catch input status set Operating Cleared Input 15 M296 Catch input status set Operating Cleared Input 16 M297 Catch input status set Operating Cleared Input I7 M300 Start control Maintained Maintained M301 Initialize pulse see note Cleared Cleared APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 2001 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 1 19 M302 All outputs off Cleared Cleared M303 Carry Cy or borrow Bw Cleared Cleared M304 User program execution Cleared Cleared error M305 Link communication error Maintained Cleared expansion mode and data link mode M306 Link communication pro Maintained Maintained hibit flag expansion mode and data link mode M307 Link communication ini Cleared Cleared tialize flag master station expansion mode and data link mode Link communication stop flag slave station expansion mode and data link mode details on page 1 20 M310 1 sec clock reset Cleared Cleared M311 1 sec clock Operating Cleared M312 100 msec clock Operating Cleared M313 10 msec clock Operating Cleared 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS A1 20 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL M314 Timer counter preset Maintained Maintained value changed M315 High speed counter Maintained Cleared soft reset M316 High speed counter Cleared Cleared
52. Preset value 100 000 is set to two data registers D17 upper digits and D18 lower digits Values for the two data registers are calculated by dividing the pre set value by 65 536 10000h as follows 100 000 _ and remainder of 34 464 65 536 i Upper Digit D17 Lower Digit D18 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 184 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL ON 10000 50 000 100 000 0 HSC1 Current Value ON i i Hard Reset Input I1 od Output QO Output 1 ON 2 High speed counter HSC1 counts input pulses to input 10 When the first set value 10 000 is reached output QO is turned on When the second preset value 50 000 is reached output QO is turned off and 1 is turned on When the last preset value 100 000 is reached output 1 is turned off and output Q2 is turned on Output Q2 remains on until hard reset input is turned on to reset the high speed counter hard reset is set to HIGH Since this example does not cause the soft reset special internal relay to reset at startup the current value is held when the Micro or Micro C is stopped 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 185 Pulse Output Control HSC2 Selecting Advanced Instructions gt High speed Counter gt Pulse Output Con trol HSC2 displays the Pulse Output Control HSC2
53. Rate G 6 BCC 10 15 10 29 BCC digits bytes 10 17 10 32 calculation formula 10 31 calculation start position 10 29 comparing codes 10 32 conversion type 10 31 INDEX 2000 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX III dialog box 10 6 Bounce Filter G 8 BCD Binary Coded Decimal G 6 BPP 9 5 bi directional shift register 9 38 BPS 9 5 G 8 ladder diagram 9 38 Branch G 8 Binary Arithmetic instructions 9 92 BRD 9 5 Binary Number System G 6 Bridge Rectifier G 8 Binary Word G 6 G 8 Bipolar G 7 Buffer G 8 Bit G 7 Bus G 8 Bit Pop BPP 9 5 Byte G 9 Bit Push BPS 9 5 Bit Read BRD 9 5 Bit Shift and Rotate instruction 9 112 Block G 7 Calendar Read CALR block check character BCC 10 15 instruction 9 122 10 29 ladder diagram 9 124 BCC digits bytes 10 17 10 32 operands 9 126 calculation formula 10 31 Calendar Write CALW calculation start position 10 29 instruction 9 122 comparing codes 10 32 ladder diagram 9 125 9 127 conversion type 10 16 10 31 operands 9 126 Block Diagram G 7 CALR block diagram instruction 9 122 Gate Control HSC3 9 195 ladder diagram 9 124 Pulse Output Control HSC2 9 190 operands 9 126 Single Stage Comparison HSCO0 CALW 9 172 instruction 9 122 Boolean Algebra G 7 ladder diagram 9 125 9 127 Boolean Computation operands 9 126 instructions 9 103 carry flags 9 95 operands 9 107 Cartridge Tapeloader Recorder G 9 repeat operation ladder diagram Cascade G29 9 109 Catch I
54. Ta R D Micro 0 99 D 0 498 Micro3C Constant 1 4 294 967 295 Repeat 2 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 171 Hard Reset Selection Input can be used to reset the current value of high speed counter 5 0 LOW Resets the current value when input I1 is turned off HSCO is enabled while is on HIGH Resets the current value when input is turned on HSCO is enabled while I1 is off Disables the hard reset Input can be used as an ordinary input Soft Reset Special Internal Relay M315 51 DI 100 M10 M301 is the initialize pulse M301 31 special internal relay Preset Value The preset value can be between 1 and 4 294 967 295 FFFF FFFFh which is designated using a constant or two consecutive data registers The first data regis ter designated by source operand S1 stores the upper digits and the next data register stores the lower digits 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 172 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL If the preset value designated by a data register is changed during the high speed counter operation then the high speed counter remains unchanged for that cycle The change will be reflected in the next count cycle after resetting Input Filter and Input Frequency The Micro and Micro C have hard and soft filter functions Only the hard filter wo
55. WindLDR functions to the specified PLC chosen in the Configure gt PLC Selection option Right Mouse gt Line Selecting the Line instruction with the right mouse button accesses the Line sub menu 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Selecting Line gt Horizontal displays a horizontal line across the selected area of the ladder The selected area appears as a shaded gray square This instruction extends the horizontal part of a rung between switches Selecting Line gt Vertical displays a vertical line running down from the selected area of the ladder The selected area appears as a shaded gray square This instruction is used to program or to connect conditions on a ladder rung To draw lines in WindLDR you may also use the SHIFT ARROW keys Or you may use the Z toolbar button This horizontal line displays when you select the Line2 Horizontal instruction with the right mouse button This vertical line displays when you select the Line Vertical instruc tion with the right mouse button E Right Mouse Basic Instructions Selecting Basic Instructions with the right mouse button accesses the Basic Instructions sub menu NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select t
56. a data register is designated with a repeat as many consecutive data regis ters as repeat cycles are used for the transmit data in the same conversion type and transmit digits 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 14 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Example Data register D10 is converted by binary to BCD to ASCII and is designated with two transmit digits 1 Repeat Cycles 2 1 2 3 4 a 32h 34h Hep 1 Binary gt BCD conversion BCD gt ASCII conversion 1 52 2 HAHHA 5 6 HAHHA 33h 34h 35b 36h JP D10 00012 2 t2 D11 _0022h Su 00034 00585 t3 D12 0038h BE 00056 Binary gt BCD conversion BCD ASCII conversion 2 Repeat Cycles 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 15 Block Check Character BCC Block check characters can be appended to the transmit data The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through 15th byte The BCC calculated in either XOR or ADD can be one or two digits Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th gt 4 3 Select BCC calculation start position from this range PONO BCC two Ta gt BCC calculation range when starting with first byte of the data BCC Calculation Start Position The start position for the BCC calcul
57. below if necessary to indicate a repeat This is the operand to which data will be inverted and moved Optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Com ment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines If Repeat is selected enter the number of repeats in the REP field 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 65 Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the MOVN instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the MOVN instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option 51 NOT D1 MOVN SI R DI R RE When an input is on 16 bit KK word data from the operand designated by S1 is inverted bit by bit and moved to the operand designated by D1 Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1 Source 1 D1 Destination 1 0 35 Q 0 31 0 31 M 0 317 0 287 T 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 R 0 63 0 63 D Micro 0 99 0 99 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 66 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL D 0 498
58. box Selecting Basic Instructions2 Counter Comparison gt Greater Than or Equal gt displays the Counter Comparison gt dialog box You may also click the toolbar button Counter Cnompadann REI Ine Equal rasiri F fm T Hylp Click the circle to the left of the appropriate selection in the field either Equal or Greater Equal Then enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Next enter the appropriate operand in the Allocation Number field In the Preset Value field enter the value to which the selected counters will be compared 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 40 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click che OK button to display the counter comparison instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without setting up a counter compar ison instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option The CC instruction is an equivalent comparison in
59. box is complete click the OK button to display the timer instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without setting up a timer click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure PLC Selection option Three types of timers are available 100 msec countdown timer TIM 10 msec countdown timer TMH and 1 msec countdown timer TMS A total of 32 timers and counters can be programmed in the standard processing mode Each timer must be allocated to a unique number 0 through 31 The same number cannot be allocated for counters In high speed mode timer num bers 0 through 15 are available The following table provides information about each available timer 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Timer 100 msec TMH 10 msec TMS 1 msec Allocation TIMO TIM3I IIMHO TIMH31 TIMSO TIMS31 Number Range 0 999 9 sec 0 99 99 sec 0 9 999 sec Increments 100 msec 10 msec 1 msec Preset 0 to 9999 Data registers DO to D99 standard mode Data registers DO to D31 high speed mode Examples of timer ladder diagrams are as follows 100 msec Timer TIM 10 msec Timer TMH 1 ms
60. controller Thyristor See SCR Timeshare A term applied to a computer which is servicing the needs of numerous users simultaneously Transceiver A PLC component that allows communications to remote 1 0 racks It converts the data from parallel communications used in the local configuration to serial communications Transducer A device used to convert physical parameters such as temperature pressure and weight into electrical signals Transfer Module A unit which supplies processor redundancy by switching program control automatically from one processor to another in the event of a failure of the GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 33 first primary processor Provides automatic and instantaneous backup for critical control or process systems TTL Abbr Transistor Transistor Logic A family of integrated circuit logic employing multiple emitter transistors for rapid switching operating in the range of 0 to 5 vdc U UV Prom Abbr Ultraviolet Programmable Read Only Memory A non volatile memory which requires approximately a 30 minute exposure to ultraviolet light in order to be reprogrammed Volatile Memory A memory that loses it s information if the power is removed Word A set of bits comprising the smallest addressable unit of information within the programmable logic controller Word Length The number of bits in a word Write To enter data into a storage devi
61. equation Pulse Width Coefficient S1 1 250 Pulse Width Ratio Pulse Width Coefficient 1 1 Pulse Width Period x msec 4 5 Period 51 2 25 6 3 2 or 1 6 msec Pulse Width Period x Pulse Width Ratio Variable Range of Pulse Width Ratio When S1 is a data register 2 4 through 100 in 0 4 increments When S1 is a constant 0 496 through 10096 in 0 496 increments 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 161 To turn the pulse output off turn the input to the PWM instruction off Pulse Width Coefficient S1 1 Pulse Width Period x 250 99 1 Pulse Width 51 2 msec x 250 Pulse Width 20 48 msec H Period 51 2 msec Pulse Width 20 48 msec PWM 51 MODE 99 When input is on output QO generates the pulse output shown above Example Illumination Control Using PWM Instruction This example demonstrates a program to control incandescent lamp illumination using the PWM instruction Analog potentiometer 0 is used to change the illu mination intensity 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 162 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Operands Qo Pulse output D20 Pulse width coefficient MODE1 Pulse cycle period 51 2 msec ANRO D20 M317 PWM S1 D20 M317 is the in opera
62. field Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field below The data in S1 is shifted to the left shifted to the right rotated to the left or rotated to the right as specified in the Type field Enter the number of bits to shift or rotate in the bit field This is the number of bits of shift or rotate which will occur to the operand 51 Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 114 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to shift or rotate the instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the shift or rotate instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse but ton instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option Shift Left SFTL SFTL CY S1 When an input is on the 16 bit data of the data register designated by source operand S1 is shifted to the left by the quantity of bits designated by operand bit The result is set to the data register The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal rel
63. for a adding UP counter must be programmed in the following order Reset input Pulse input CNT instruction Counter number from 2 to 31 Ror Counter preset value from 0 to 9999 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 32 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The preset value can be designated with a constant or data register When a data register is used the information in the data register becomes the preset value Adding UP Counter CNT2 to 31 M C2 The same counter or timer number cannot programmed more than once e While the reset input is off the counter counts the leading edges of pulse inputs and compares them with the preset value When the counted value reaches the preset value the counter turns the out put on The output stays on until the reset input is turned on When the reset input changes from off to on the counted value is reset When the reset input is all pulse inputs are ignored e The reset input must be turned off before counting may begin When the power is off the counters counted value is maintained e Counter preset values can be changed without transferring the entire pro gram to the PLC base unit When the preset value is changed during the counter s operation the change becomes effective immediately e reset input has priority over the pulse input Within one scan after the reset input has changed from on to o
64. for the current PLC as selected in the PLC selection option of the Configure menu field descriptions Clicking an option selects it To deselect the 5 Click the appropriate PLC settings as described in the following option click another option and click OK Once the appropriate function area settings have been selected click the OK button To back out of this option without any changes click the Cancel button To access on line help press the Help button To return to the default settings for the PLC click the Default but ton at any time 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 9 Micro 1 FA1J 2 5 CP11 11T CP12 13 Function Area Settings Run Stop setting This option stops and starts operation of the PLC When the designated input terminal is turned on the PLC operation stops The program operation is then restarted if and when the stop input goes off bir er mo i ee r T ste ow da activate the Stop Input No setting click the box to the left of Stop Input to display a check mark Then in the Input number field enter the desired input number An enable stop input number can be any input terminal with a value from 10 to I17 for Micro 1 10 to 1317 for FA Series CP12 and CP13 and 10 to 1157 for the rest of the FA Series NOTE
65. hexadecimal notation on the program loader Receive Status Code Code Status Description 1 Preparing to From the point when the start input for an RXD receive data instruction is turned on to read the receive format until the RXD instruction is enabled by END processing 2 Receiving From the point when the RXD instruction is enabled data by END processing until incoming data is received 3 Data receive From the point when incoming data is received complete until the received data is converted and stored in data registers according to the receive format 4 Receive From the point when all data is received until the instruction next data receiving is possible complete 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 34 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL If data receiving is aborted by an error then remove the cause of the error and turn the start input for the RXD instruction on again For error codes and causes refer to Appendix III PLC Error Codes Receive Data Byte Count The data register following the operand designated for the receive status stores the byte count of the data received by the RXD instruction When a start delim iter end delimiter and BCC are included in the received data the byte counts for these codes are also included in the receive data byte count 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Micro 1 PLC Allocation Table
66. instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the A D conversion instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button The analog digital conversion A D instruction is used to convert an analog value from the A D converter unit to a digital value and stores the result to a data H A D D1 08 When input is on the analog data from the A D converter unit FC2A AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 or AD5 connected to input 10 is converted to a digital value and set to a data register designated by destination operand D1 register The resolution of the A D conversion can be selected from 8 bits or 12 bits NOTE Either the A D or high speed counter HSC instruction can be used only once a user program The A D converter unit can be connected to input 10 of the Micro or Micro C at the base station only not at the expansion station Valid Operands Standard Processing Operand D1 Destination 1 Function Destination to store data Operand D 0 99 for Micro 0 498 for Micro C 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 165 Digital Data Range Depending on the selected resolution of the A D conversion the digital data stored in the data register is limited to the range shown below Resolution Digital Data Range 8 bits 0 249 or 250 12 bits 0 through 3999 or 4000
67. is on 16 bit word data designated by source operands 51 and 52 are compared When 51 data is greater than or equal to S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off Repeat Operation in the Comparison Instructions When S1 and or S2 source is designated with a repeat D1 destination is nor mally required to be designated with a repeat Otherwise only the result of the comparison in the last repeat cycle is set to one destination 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 85 When S1 and D1 are designated with a repeat as many operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S1 are compared with the operand des ignated by 52 The comparison results are set to as many operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by D1 gt SIR 52 DIR REP D20 15 M10 3 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 M10 turned off M11 turned on M12 turned on 15 When S2 and D1 are designated with a repeat the operand designated by S1 is compared with as many operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand des ignated by 52 The comparison results set to as many operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by D1 CMPs SI 528 DIR REP 20 DIS 00 3 51 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 QO turned on Q1 turned on Q2 turned off 20
68. line help click the Help button If the BCC option is selected in the Type field of the Data Type Selec tion dialog box then the BCC dialog box will display Aer abyr paa iian Tau im xr C Varezieon lupa ligi fe in ASTE 1 C rig 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 7 field Then click the circle to the left of the appropriate Calculate 5 Enter the first character to be read the Calculate start position Type option either XOR for exclusive OR or ADD for addition Click the circle to the left of the appropriate Conversion Type option either BIN to ASCII or None Finally click the circle to the left of either 1 or 2 in the Digits field to determine the number of bytes that will be considered in the BCC calculation Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to save the BCC instruction To back out of this dialog box without selecting a BCC instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button Delete Use the Delete button to remove a transmit or receive instruction Within the S1 field click the option to be deleted Once the appropriate option is highlighted click the Delete button The transmit or receive instruction will no longer display in the S1 field Edit To edit an existing transmit or receive instruction click the Edit button Within the S1 field c
69. option refer to page 1 5 and to Chapter 9 Editing the Ladder 2 WINDLDR LEGENDS 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 2 7 Advanced Instruction Icons Pulse Analog to a Indirect Move 9101 Digital HSCO eu Compare x Single Stage Comparison Mus dd e Arithmetic ENS ag Comparison HSC2 Boolean Pulse Output Control SE RO Bit Shift HSC3 HSC3 5 Rotate Gate Control Transmit Clock a Receive at Calendar amp available w pa Macro 5 A Digital Read NOP No Operation E Analog Read 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 2 WINDLDR LEGENDS 2 8 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Basic Instruction Icons Select Coils n Timer 2 Draw Line zal Counter Counter cl Erase Delete E Timer Compare Normally SFR s A 4 H Open T Shift Register Normally Master Vi Closed Control Set MCR Master ne fa Control Reset MA Output Not Jump xi Set y Jump End xoi Reset Single r Output Up Single al Output Down NOTE For complete instructions about these basic instruction icons refer to Chapter 9 Editing the Ladder 2 WINDLDR LEGENDS 2001 IDEC CORPORATION The available m
70. option allows you to append a ladder line column or rung at any point in the program and in any location Selecting Delete allows you to delete a coil ladder line column or rung at any time NOTE You may also delete a coil ladder line or rung by selecting it and using the DELETE button on your keyboard 4 EDIT MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 4 5 Edit gt Coil Selecting the Coil option from the Edit menu accesses the editor related to the currently selected coil Coils may also be edited by double clicking on them within the ladder file 24 5 EIE TIED he After editing the coil click OK to accept and save your changes 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 4 EDIT MENU 4 6 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Edit gt Edit Rung Comment Selecting the Edit Rung Comment option from the Edit menu allows you to edit the current rung comment as well as to edit all rung comments by using the 3 and H buttons EB lam Hih ete 1 THE ullas il ns srrepbg zczldm vyTesEeszzxN DEPTEDEDGSHEELEZJAZEFEEE To enter a comment click within the text area and begin typing The comment entered is applicable to the number of the rung which displays in the upper left corner You may access and edit all rung comments by clicking the 3 and E buttons The E b
71. or D2 is not designated then the source or destination operand is determined by 51 or D1 without an offset 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 78 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Example IMOVN IMOVN 51 52 DI D2 REP 10 C10 D10 D30 D20 C10 D10 NOT gt D30 D20 Source operand S1 and destination operand D1 determine the type of operand Source operand 52 and destination operand D2 are the offset values to determine the source and destination operands If the data of data register D10 designated by source operand S2 is 4 then the source is determined by adding the offset to counter C10 designated by source operand S1 10 4 C14 If data register D20 designated by destination operand D2 contains a value of 15 then the destination is determined by adding the offset to data register D30 designated by destina tion operand D1 D 30 15 D45 As a result when input IO is on the current value of counter C14 is inverted moved to data register D45 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Comparison Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Comparison gt accesses a sub menu of com parison instructions Equal To CMP Not Equal To CMP lt gt Less Than CMP lt Greater Than CMP gt Less Than or Equal CMP lt 1 Greater Than or Equal CMP gt 1 and Double Word Compare CMP2 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 79 NOTE The Double Word Compare
72. please refer to the ONC Hardware Manual 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 34 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL MicroSmart Function Area Settings Please refer to the instructions and information in the previous section Micro and Micro C Function Area Settings Some instructions for the MicroSmart are the same as those for the Micro Micro C and ONC For further details on the Function Area Settings of the MicroSmart please refer to the MicroSmart Hardware Manual The dialog boxes for the MicroSmart Function Area Settings are shown below NIST D ETE T ca hee T mm m beens Ims T L TT E I t ECL E Special Input Communication Others 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 35 Configure gt Communication Settings Selecting the Communication settings option from the Configure menu allows you to set up the communication mode settings These settings determine how the PLC and PC will communicate with each other ws Vm mmdamm ws smi vmi E ndsm zi Ts Tos Eu Tes zl Eu 0 Giese 1 m m m Tic Apre iniy gt Tic Apre iniy c1 11 IH Demak 43 43 1 and Series Micro Micro C ONC Select the appropriate communication sett
73. point that all data transmission is com transmission pleted until the END processing is completed for complete the TXD instruction 4 Transmit From the point that all transmission operation is instruction complete until the next transmission is possible complete 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 19 If data transmission is aborted by an error then remove the cause of the error and turn the start input for the TXD instruction on again For error codes and causes refer to Appendix III PLC Error Codes Transmit Data Byte Count The data register next to the operand is designated for the transmit status and stores the byte count of data transmitted by the TXD instruction When BCC is included in the transmit data the byte count of the BCC is also included in the transmit data byte count Receive RXD When an input is on the data received through the loader port of a remote ter minal with an RS232C port is converted and stored in data registers according to the receive format designated by S1 Valid Operands Standard Processing Operand S1 D1 D2 Source 1 Destination 1 Destination 2 Function Receive data Receive comple Receive status output Q 0 31 E M 0 287 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 20 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 0 498 0 497 Constant
74. program loader M307 Link Com When a slave station does not receive com munication munication data from the master station in Stop Flag the data link system for 800msec or more M307 turns on When the slave station receives correct communication data M307 turns off M310 1 sec Clock When M310 is on M311 1 second clock Reset is reset to zero M311 1 sec Clock When M310 is off M311 generates clock pulses in 1 second increments with a duty ratio of 1 1 500 msec on and 500 msec off M312 100 msec M312 always generates clock pulses in 100 Clock msec increments whether M310 is on or off with a duty ratio of 1 1 50 msec on and 50 msec off APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 0 1004 B Om Cfo Ife 7 wale y WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 1 11 M313 10 msec M313 always generates clock pulses in 10 Clock msec increments whether M310 is on or off with a duty ratio of 1 1 5 msec on and 5 msec off M314 Timer When timer or counter preset values are Counter changed in the Micro base unit RAM Preset Value M314 turns on When a user program is Changed transferred to Micro or when the changed timer counter preset value is cleared using FUN21 M314 turns off M315 High Speed When M315 is turned on while a high Counter Soft speed counter HSC0 HSC1 HSC2 or Reset HSC3 is used the high speed counter cur rent value is reset to zero When M315 is turned off th
75. than once with one scan the output nearest to the END instruction is given priority 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 13 The following chart provides all OUT operands Instruction Standard High Speed mm Q 000 031 000 011 M 000 287 000 047 R name or nickname in the Tag Name field 5 Accept the default Output the Type field Then enter the tag Next enter the appropriate operand in the Allocation Number field Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the OUT instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without inserting an output click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 14 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Basic Instructions Output Not OUTN Selecting Basic Instructions gt Output Not OUTN displays the Output Not OUTN dialog box You may also click the toolbar button red Hame C Dupa Pri e kiss Hof Mander t a lag Hare C Cancel Help NOTE The right mouse button is c
76. the Word Write field Press the TAB button to navigate between entry fields At any time click the OK button to return to the monitoring screen To access on line help press the Help button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 18 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL To Change Instruction Preset Values of Timers Enter T plus the allocation number in the left white box of the Word Write field Press the TAB key The preset value displays in the gray box Enter the new preset value in the right white box Press the ENTER key The new preset value display in the gray box Counters Enter C plus the allocation number in the left white box of the Word Write field Press the TAB key The preset value displays in the gray box Enter the new preset value in the right white box Press the ENTER key The new preset value display in the gray box Data Registers Enter D plus the allocation number in the left white box of the Word Write field Press the TAB key The preset value displays in the gray box Enter the new preset value in the right white box Press the ENTER key The new preset value display in the gray box 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 19 NOTE Changes made to the timers and counters can be removed in the PLC status dialog box Access the PLC status dialog box from the Online menu in the monitoring mode Online gt Mo
77. the current rung comment as well as to edit all rung com ments by using the and buttons The number of the rung comment which is currently being edited displays in this field Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the available rung comments P sers Tales oe cee Le mi joe enter comment click within the text area and begin typing The comment entered is applicable to the number of the rung which displays in the upper left corner You may access and edit all rung comments by clicking the and EZ buttons button accesses the previous rung comment The button accesses the next rung comment Comments are saved each time a new rung is accessed Once all rung comments are entered click the Close button to close the Rung Comment Dialog screen To access on line help press the button NOTE The Micro and Micro C allow up to characters per line within the Rung Comment field The Micro 1 allows up to 48 characters per line 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 3 Right Mouse gt Help Selecting the Help option with the right mouse button accesses the complete on line help file The detailed set of Help screens is like having an entire library of PLC manuals at your fingertips complete with easy access and context sensitive help about everything from
78. value 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 193 The HSC3 can count up to 65535 When another input pulse enters at 65535 the current value becomes 0 and special internal relay M316 HSC3 overflow is turned on The current value of the high speed counter is reset to zero when the Micro or Micro C is powered up The high speed counter holds the current value while the Micro or Micro C is stopped and restarts counting input pulses starting with the existing current value Include the hard reset or soft reset in the user program if necessary NOTE One instruction HSCO through HSC3 and A D can be used only once a user program Allocation Numbers The HSC3 instruction uses the following input and internal relay numbers Pulse input Input IO Hard reset input Input I1 Gate input Input I2 Soft reset special internal relay Internal relay M315 when M315 is on the current value is reset to zero HSC3 overflow special Internal relay M316 internal relay 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 194 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand Function D D1 Destination 1 Store the current value 0 99 for Micro 0 498 for Micro C Hard Reset Selection Input I1 can be used to reset the current value of high speed counter HSC3 LOW Resets the current value when
79. with accuracy Printed Circuit A board on which a predetermined pattern of printed connections has been formed 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 26 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Processor A unit in the programmable logic controller which scans all the inputs and outputs in a predetermined order The processor monitors the status of all the I Os in response to the users programed instruc tions stored within the memory and energizes or de energizes outputs as the result of logical com parisons made through these programed instruc tions Program A sequence of instructions to be executed by the programmable logic controller to control a machine or process Programmable Logic A solid state control system which has a user pro Controller grammable memory for storage of instructions to implement specific functions such as 1 0 control logic timing counting arithmetic and data manipulation A PC or PLC consists of a Central Processing Unit CPU 1 0 interface modules memory and a programing device A PC PLC was purposely designed as an industrial control system PROM Abbr Programmable Read Only Memory A digi tal storage device which can be written into once but continually read GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 55 27 Protocol A standardized procedure for establishing a com munications link between two or more devices based on such elements as word
80. 0 Month D21 Day D22 Day of Week D23 Hour D24 Minute D25 Second D26 This program does not compare the data of the day of week and second ANT 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 134 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Comparison Data 2 Turn on output QO Comparison Data 1 Turn on output QO Month D30 MIO Comparison Data 3 Comparison Data 4 Turn on output QO Turn on output QO Comparison Data 6 Comparison Data 5 Turn on output QO Turn on output QO Month D50 Day D51 Day of Week D52 Hour D53 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL CMP CMP CMP CMP CMP CMP 2001 SIR D21 SIR D21 SIR D21 SIR D21 SIR D21 SIR D21 52 D30 S2R D35 S2R D40 S2R D45 S2R D50 S2R D55 DIR REP M10 5 DIR REP M20 5 DIR REP M30 5 DIR REP M40 5 DIR REP M50 5 1 REP M60 5 9 135 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 136 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL M317 is the in operation special internal relay While the program is executed the clock read CLKR instruction reads the calendar and clock data to data reg isters D20 year D21 month D22 day D23 day of week D24 hour D25 minute and D26 second The compare equal to instruction compares the current values of the month day day of week hour and minute in data reg
81. 0 M7 232 points 40 points high speed M10 M17 M20 M27 30 37 40 47 Standard only 50 57 232 points 40 points 60 67 70 77 80 87 90 97 100 107 110 117 120 127 130 137 140 147 150 157 M160 M167 170 177 180 187 190 197 M200 M207 210 217 220 227 M230 M237 240 247 250 257 M260 M267 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 1 16 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Internal Relay Standard only 270 277 232 points 40 points continued 280 287 Catch Input Standard 290 297 8 points 8 points Relay high speed Special Inter Standard M300 M307 16 points 16 points nal Relay high speed M310 M317 Timer Standard TO T15 high speed Standard only T16 T31 32 points total 16 points total Counter Standard 0 15 high speed Standard only C16 C31 Shift Register Standard RO R31 64 points 32 points high speed Standard only R32 R63 Data Register Standard 00 031 500 points 32 points high speed Standard only 032 0499 APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS O 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 1 17 Micro C I O Allocation Numbers for Expansion Link System Input and output allocation numbers do not continue from the base station to the expansion statio
82. 0 498 Micro3C Constant 0 65535 Repeat 1 31 1 31 NOTE When used in the high speed processing mode possible operands are limited When a timer or counter is used as 51 the timer counter current value is read out When a or C is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 9999 When a bit operand such as an input output internal relay or shift register is used as the source or destination 16 points are used When a repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 point increments Example MOVN M10 NOT gt M50 When an input is on the 16 internal relays starting with M10 designated 51 are inverted bit by bit and moved to the 16 internal relays starting with M50 designated by D1 MOVN SI D1 REP 10 M10 M17 M20 M27 NOT M50 57 M60 M67 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 67 The on off statuses of the 16 internal relays M10 M17 and M20 M27 inverted and moved to 16 internal relays M50 M57 and 60 67 When M50 and M60 are monitored on the program loader the data is displayed as shown on the right below M50 is the least significant bit 1 5 and M67 is the most significant bit MSB Before inversion M17 MO MSB LSB After inversion M67 M50 MSB LSB 810 NOT gt D2 MOVN 51 REP 810 us When in
83. 00 IDEC CORPORATION Edit menu 4 1 Append option 4 4 Coil option 4 5 Copy 4 2 Cut 4 2 Delete option 4 4 Edit Rung Comment option 4 6 Find option 4 3 Insert option 4 4 Paste 4 2 Select Rung 4 3 Tag Name Editor option 4 7 Undo option 4 2 Edit Rung Comment option 4 6 Edit rung comment option 9 2 editing keys 2 1 Editor Tag Name 4 8 EEPROM G 14 Element G 14 Encode G 14 END 9 6 9 43 9 46 instruction 9 49 End END 9 6 instruction 9 49 EPROM G 14 Equal Counter Comparison CC instruction 9 39 ladder diagram 9 41 Equal To CMP instruction 9 78 Error G 14 error codes A2 1 first digit A2 2 second digit A2 3 third digit A2 4 error list 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX VII all PLCs A2 14 Error Message dialog box 7 2 Escape G 14 Exclusive OR Word XORW instruction 9 103 ladder diagram 9 106 operands 9 107 repeat operation 9 108 Execution G 15 Execution Time G 15 Exit WindLDR option 3 7 F FA Series 1 1 1 5 Communication Device Number 6 15 configuration 6 5 Download dialog box 8 24 External functions 6 14 Function Area Settings 6 9 High Speed Counter FA1J 2J only 6 18 Keep functions 6 11 Maximum I O 6 16 Remote I O FA3S CP12 13 only 6 17 Reset Input Number setting 6 10 Run Stop setting 6 9 Upload dialog box 8 23 User Interrupt FA3S CP12 13 only 6 17 FAI configuration 6 5 FA2 configuration 6 5 FA3S configuration 6 5 CP11 6 5 CP11T 6 5 CP
84. 000 For exam ple entering input 2 I2 will display as I0002 If the Default button is pressed this option turns off If an invalid input stop number is entered an error message displays A valid input number must be entered or the invalid number erased 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 20 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Reset Input This option stops the operation of the Micro Micro C and ONC and resets the counters and internal relays To turn the reset input off check the box to the left of the Reset Input option If the Default button is pressed this option turns off If an invalid input stop number is entered an error message will display A valid input number must be entered or the invalid number erased Keep Functions 3 optional status managing functions are available within this field Internal Relay Keep The status of internal relays M0 M287 for Micro and Micro C 0 2557 for the ONC are cleared in the event of a power failure It is possible however to designate some internal relays to retain their status when the program is restarted Ime ower wawa perms rmt how e m Foam Fo Tun Ton FESTE ike a 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 21 The All Clear option also the default setting clears the status of all internal relays upon
85. 01 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 86 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When 51 52 and D1 are designated with a repeat as many operands as repeat cycles starting with the operands designated by 51 and 52 are compared with each other The comparison results are set to as many operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by D1 gt SIR S2R DIR REP DIS D20 QI0 3 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 D20 D21 D22 Q10 turned on Q11 turned on Q12 turned off Double Word Comparison CMP2 NOTE This instruction is available with the Micro C PLC only The double word comparison CMP2 instruction is useful to compare the data received through user communication The CMP2 instruction compares data in data registers Two consecutive data registers designated by a source operand are compared with two consecutive data registers designated by another source operand When used with a repeat desig nation one CMP2 instruction can execute a maximum of 31 double word com parison operations With a repeat designation the results of all double word comparisons can be ANDed so the comparison results are easily determined even when comparing a large number of data 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 87 S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 to D1 on CMP2 SI R S2 R DI R REP When an input is on the 32 bit data
86. 02 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Once an instruction is selected in the Type field and the OK button is pressed the Constant Character dialog box will display Di n2 d BE nn Cant gt 2 Hrip If the Constant Character option is selected from the Data Selection dialog box then the Character field will display If the Constant Hex decimal option is selected from the Data Type Selection dialog box then the Hex decimal field will display In the Character field enter the constant character string which will gt display in the 51 field of the Macro dialog box In the Hex decimal field enter the constant hex decimal string which will display in the S1 field of the Macro dialog box Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to save the data To back out of this dialog box without selecting data click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 203 Delete Use the Delete button to remove a macro instruction Within the 1 field click the option to be deleted Once the appropriate option is highlighted click the Delete button The macro instruction will no longer display in the S1 field or in the database Edit To edit an existing macro click the Insert button If an option is selected within the 51 field when the Edit button is cli
87. 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 23 Upload Dialog Below is the PLC Selection dialog box NOTE Different screens display depending on the selected PLC denim Pram xe amp Micro and Micro 1 FA1J 2J amp MicroSmart FASS CP11 11T CP12 13 Click on the desired options Then press the OK button As the transfer occurs it will display the current transfer status To back out of this option click the Cancel button To access on line help press the Help button Upload From Click the diamond to the left of the desired option Select to upload the file from either a PLC or a loader Transfer Mode MicroSmart ONC Micro and Micro C only Click the circle to the left of the desired option Note whether the transfer mode is binary or ASCII 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 24 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL PLC Network Type Click the circle to the left of the desired option Select 1 1 if only one device is connected to your PC Select 1 N if a PLC network is connected to your PC Online gt Download program Selecting the Download program option from the Online menu allows you to download a ladder file from your PC and convert it to a file on your PLC or pro gram loader You may also click the toolbar button 9 PLC Download Dialog For downloading click Online 2Download The following s
88. 12 6 5 CP13 6 5 Failure G 15 Fault G 15 Fault Current G 15 Feedback G 15 File G 15 File menu 3 1 cover page option 3 6 Cross Reference option 3 6 Exit option 3 7 Function Area Settings option 3 6 Ladder Preview option 3 5 Listings option 3 5 New option 3 2 Open option 3 2 Print Setup option 3 7 Program Compare option 3 6 Save As option 3 4 Save option 3 3 Tag Name option 3 6 Filter G 15 Find option 4 3 Find String 1 2 Firmware G 15 Fixed Point G 16 Floating Point G 16 Flow Chart G 16 Forward Shift Register SFR 9 34 instruction 9 33 ladder diagram 9 35 Full Duplex G 16 INDEX VIII WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Function Area Settings Catch Input Micro3 3C only 6 23 Communication Device Number Micro 1 amp FA Series 6 15 Communication Device Number Micro3 3C amp ONC 6 26 Control Data Register Micro3 3C amp ONC 6 28 External functions Micro 1 amp FA Series 6 14 FA Series 6 9 High Speed Counter FA1J 2 only 6 18 Input Filter Time Selection Micro3 3C amp ONC 6 24 Keep Functions Micro 1 amp FA Series 6 11 Keep Functions Micro3 3C amp ONC 6 20 Maximum I O FA Series only 6 16 Micro 1 6 8 6 9 Micro3 6 18 Micro3C 6 18 MicroSmart 6 34 ONC 6 18 6 32 Processing Mode Micro3 3C only 6 22 Remote I O FA3S CP12 amp CP13 6 17 Reset Input No setting Micro 1 amp FA Series 6 10 Run Stop setting Micro 1 amp Series 6 9 Run Stop setting Micro3 3C amp ONC 6 19 User
89. 185 Gate Control HSC3 9 191 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Macro 9 198 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions No Operation NOP 9 206 Right Mouse Insert 9 206 Right Mouse Append 9 207 Right Mouse Delete 9 207 Right Mouse Split Rung 9 208 Right Mouse Join Rung 9 208 Right Mouse Disable Rung 9 208 Chapter 10 Transmit Receive s oe e que iterat red 10 1 Transmit TXD 10 8 Receive RXD 10 19 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL VII Appendix 1 Allocation Numbers seme d 1 1 Micro 1 PLC 1 1 Micro Allocation Numbers 1 5 Micro C Allocation Numbers A1 12 Appendix 2 E ERE X PECES ES A2 1 General Error Codes 2 1 First Digit Error Codes A2 2 Second Digit Error Codes A2 3 Third Digit Error Codes A2 4 Micro 1 Error Causes and Actions A2 4 Micro and Micro C Error Codes 2 5 Master Error Lists for All PLCs A2 14 Glossary Glossary abe phe aan x DS Hite aca did 1 Index I 2001 IDEC CORPORATION TABLE OF CONTENTS WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 1 INTRODUCTION Welcome to IDEC s WindLDR configuration software package where logic and intuition converge WindLDR is a true Windows application with WYSI WYG what you see is what you get ladder editing The WindLDR Reference Man
90. 2 1 0 0 TO 1T1 S1 and S2 are ORed bit by bit The result is set to destination operand p1 di Exclusive OR Word XORW XORW SI R S2 R DI R REP S1 S2 gt D1 When an input is on 16 bit word s 000101 25 data designated source operands 52 1 000 Y 1 1 51 and 52 are exclusively ORed bit by bit The result is set to destina tion operand D1 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 107 Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1 S2 D1 Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1 Function Data for Data for Destination to computation computation store results 0 35 0 35 0 31 0 31 0 31 M 0 317 0 317 0 287 T 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 R 0 63 0 63 0 63 D Micro 0 99 0 99 0 99 D 0 498 0 498 0 498 Micro C Constant 0 65535 0 65535 Repeat 1 31 1 31 1 31 When timer or counter is used as 51 or 52 the current value of the timer counter is read out When T or C is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 9999 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 108 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL NOTE When using the timer or counter as a destination make sure that the data does not exceed the maximum preset value of 9999 When the preset value exceeds 9999 a user
91. 2 CMP lt gt Compare unequal 4 or 5 to 23 CMP Compare less than 4 or 5 24 CMP gt Compare greater or 5 Micro than base units 25 CMP lt Compare less 4or5 than or equal to 26 CMP gt Compare greater 4 or 5 than or equal to 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 52 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Com B3 CMP2 Double word 4or5 Micro C only parison comparison continued Binary 31 ADD Addition 4 or 5 Arithmetic 32 SUB Subtraction 4 or 5 All Micro 33 MUL Multiplication 4 or 5 base units 34 DIV Division 4 or 5 Boolean 41 ANDW And word 4 or 5 9 Computa 42 ORW word 4 5 More tion base units 43 XORW Exclusive or word 4 or 5 Bit Shift 51 SFTL Shift left 3 and Rotate 52 SFTR Shift right 3 53 Rotate left 3 base units 54 ROTR Rotate right 3 Real Time 71 CALR Calendar read 2 16 and 24 Calendar 72 CALW Calendar write 2 point types only Clock 73 CLKR Clock read 2 16 24 74 CLKW Clock write 2 point types 75 ADJ Adjust 1 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 53 Interface 81 DISP Display 4 3 82 DGRD Digital switch read 4 e Mice base units 83 ANRO Analog read 0 2 84 ANRI
92. 2 ERROR CODES 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A2 13 Error Code Error Details 1 As a result of an advanced instruction a value exceeding 9999 is written into the timer counter preset value Data is written into the preset value of a timer counter which is not included in the user program or which uses a data register as a preset value 2 A data register used as a preset value for timer counter or counter comparison instruction exceeds 9999 3 An indirect operand for the IMOV or IMOVN instruction is out of range 4 Overflow or underflow has resulted from an advanced instruction 5 Division by 0 is not possible 6 Invalid data occurred during the data conversion of the DISP or DGRD instruction 7 An attempt was made to write invalid value to calendar clock data 8 A data register used as an operand for the PULS or PWM instruction contains invalid data 9 The quantity of multi stage preset data for high speed counter HSC1 exceeds the available data registers An invalid numeric allocation number is designated as a comparison output of HSCI 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2 14 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Remove the cause of the error and clear the error code using FUN20 on the pro gram loader Special internal relay M304 is reset when restarting the Micro or Micro C operation or can also be reset using the program loader MO
93. 2 is ANDed ORed or exclusively ORed as specified in the Type field 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 105 Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper D1 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat The result of the Boolean computation is set to operand D1 Optionally enter any associated comment in the tag name comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines If Repeat is selected enter the number of repeats in the REP field Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the Boolean instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the Boolean instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button And Word ANDW ANDW SI R S2 R DI R REP S1 S2 gt D1 When an input is on 16 bit word data designated by source operands S1 and S2 are ANDed bit by bit The result is set to destination operand D1 S1 352 DI 52 10 0 0 1 o o o o 1 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 106 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL OR Word ORW SI R S2 R DI R REP S1 52 gt D1 When an input is on 16 bit word 1 TORON Ms data designated by source operands s
94. 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 1 TRANSMIT RECEIVE This chapter describes the programming of the transmit TXD instruction and receive RXD instruction for user communication NOTE This instruction is only available for the Micro C PLC With the protocol selector switch set to 1 or 3 to select the user protocol for the loader port the can transmit data using the TXD instruction through the loader port to an RS232C remote terminal such as a computer printer or modem The Micro C can also receive data through the loader port from a remote termi nal with an RS232C port The received data is converted and stored in data reg isters as designated by the RXD instruction To access the Transmit Receive instruction click the toolbar button find 2 2001 1 ere 7 wd eh 1O TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 5 Complete the fields explained below the field descriptions Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to insert the transmit or receive instruction on your ladder To back out of this dialog box without utilizing the transmit or receive instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button Type Click the circle to the left of the desired option either TXD for the transmit instruction or RXD for the receive instruction 51 Originally when no options are entered only the blank tag name field displ
95. 33 configuration 6 6 Control Data Register 6 28 Data Link dialog box 6 33 Download dialog box 8 24 Filter Catch dialog box 6 33 Function Area Settings 6 18 6 32 Input Filter Time Selection 6 24 Keep functions 6 20 Keep functions dialog box 6 32 Module I O dialog screen 6 32 Open Bus dialog box 6 33 Others dialog box 6 33 Run Stop setting 6 19 Run Stop settings dialog box 6 32 Status 8 5 Status dialog screen 8 6 Upload dialog box 8 23 1 msec Timer TMS instruction 9 22 100 msec Timer TIM instruction 9 22 ladder diagram 9 25 On Line G 23 on line help 1 5 9 3 Online menu 8 1 Batch Monitor option 8 20 Communication Error option 8 5 Direct Monitor dialog box 8 14 Download Program option 8 24 Link Map option 8 4 Monitor option 8 2 Point Write dialog screen 8 17 Upload Program option 8 21 On Line Operation G 23 Open 1 4 Open Net Controller Configuration 6 6 Open option 3 2 operand error list A2 20 operands Analog Read 0 ANRO 9 148 Analog To Digital Conversion A D 9 164 binary arithmetic ADD SUB MUL DIV 9 94 Boolean Computation 9 107 Calendar Read CALR Calendar Write CALW 9 126 Clock Read CLKR 9 128 Clock Write CLKW 9 130 Compare CMP 9 81 Digital Read DGRD 9 144 Display DISP 9 139 Double Word Compare 9 87 Gate Control HSC3 9 194 Indirect Move IMOV 9 71 Indirect Move Not 9 76 Move MOV 9 59 Move Not MOVN 9 65 Multi stage Comparison HSC1 INDEX XVI WINDLDR REFERENCE
96. 38 9 176 9 182 OR Word ORW 9 106 Boolean Computation repeat 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX Pulse Output PULS 9 151 9 154 9 155 Pulse Output Control HSC2 9 186 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 9 158 9 162 Receive RXD 10 19 repeat operation ADD 9 96 Reverse Shift Register SFRN 9 37 Rotate Left ROTL 9 118 Rotate Right ROTR 9 120 9 121 Shift Left SFTL 9 114 Shift Right SFTR 9 116 9 118 Single Output Down SOTD 9 21 Single Output Up SOTU 9 21 Single stage Comparison HSCO 9 169 9 174 Subtraction SUB 9 97 timer TIM TMH TMS 9 24 Transmit TXD 10 8 Up Down Selection Reversible Counter CNT1 9 30 Ladder Preferences option 6 37 Coil Parameters 6 38 font dialog box 6 39 Rung Display 6 37 Ladder Preview option 3 5 Ladder to Mnemonic Conversion dialog box 7 2 7 3 Language G 19 Least Significant Digit G 19 Left Justified G 20 Less Than CMP 9 78 Less Than or Equal CMP 9 78 Line instruction 9 3 Line Printer G 20 Link Map option 8 4 INDEX XII WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Listings option 3 5 Load G 20 Load LOD 9 6 instruction 9 8 Load Not LODN 9 6 instruction 9 10 Local I 0 G 20 Location G 20 LOD 9 6 instruction 9 8 9 41 operands 9 8 LOD SFR instruction 9 37 LODN 9 6 instruction 9 10 operands 9 10 Logic G 20 Logic Level G 20 Loop G 20 M315 9 171 5 9 178 HSC2 9 188 HSC3 9 194 machine code 1 2 Macro Constant Character dialog box 9 202 9 203 9 20
97. 4 1 1 igits 34h 31h 34h 81h 2 BCC Digits 1 Comparing Codes The Micro C compares the BCC calculation result with the BCC code in the received incoming data This checks for any errors in the incoming communica tion due to causes such as external noises If a disparity is found in the compari son then an error code is stored in the data register designated as receive status in the RXD instruction Receive Completion Output Designate an output Q0 Q31 or internal relay MO M287 as an operand for the receive completion output When the start input for an RXD instruction is turned on preparation for receiving the data is initiated followed by data conversion and storage When all data is received the designated output or internal relay is turned on 1O TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 33 Receive Status Designate data register D0 D497 as the operand to store the receive status information including a receive status code and a user communication error code When the data register designated for the receive status is monitored in hexadec imal notation on the program loader the second lowest digit indicates a receive status code and the lowest digit indicates a user communication error code If no error exists then the lowest digit indicates 0 To view the receive status monitor the designated data register in
98. 488 5 RTS is turned on or off according to DSR When DSR is on RTS is turned on When DSR is off RTS remains off Use this option for returning con trol signal and acknowledgment when data flow control with the remote terminal is required D488 6 Same as D488 0 D487 Reserved 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS A1 32 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL D486 RTS control signal ON OFF timer When group 2 is enabled as the expansion control data registers and 10488 is set to 0 or 1 to synchronize the transmit data with the RTS signal D486 is used to set the amount of time to turn on and off the RTS signal before and after trans mitting data The RTS control signal ON OFF timer can be used only in the user protocol to communicate through the loader port D486 0 249 Increments 10 msec Any value over 249 is regarded as 249 The maximum timer error is 20 msec 2 scan time Operating Status and Control Signals Communica tion Mode Stopped Micro C Running User Protocol DTR and RTS are on except DTR is off when D489 ORIS is off when D488 2 Control signal statuses depend on D488 through D490 options Modem Mode DTR and RTS are on as standard Initial settings are D488 2 D489 0 D490 0 Loader Protocol Control signal options have no effect Communication is executed with D488 0 D489
99. 5 Data Type Selection dialog box 9 201 9 204 instruction 9 198 Magnetic Core G 21 Magnetic Tape G 21 master control circuit INDEX 2000 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX XIII Micro3 6 4 allocation numbers A1 5 Allocation Table A1 6 base unit system code D90 6 30 counter and shift register 9 45 Master Control Reset MCR 9 6 instruction 9 12 9 14 9 21 9 42 ladder diagram 9 21 9 44 Master Control Set MCS 9 6 Catch Input 6 23 instruction 9 12 9 14 9 21 9 42 Communication Device Number ladder diagram 9 21 9 44 6 26 Matrix G 21 configuration 6 4 MCR 9 6 Control Data Register 6 28 instruction 9 12 9 14 9 42 ladder diagram 9 44 MCS 9 6 instruction 9 12 9 14 9 21 9 42 ladder diagram 9 21 9 44 multiple usages of instructions 9 44 Download dialog box 8 24 error causes and actions 2 7 error codes 2 5 Function Area Settings 6 18 Input Filter Time Selection 6 24 Keep functions 6 20 Medium Scale G 21 Processing mode 6 22 Memory G 21 Run Stop setting 6 19 Memory Module G 21 special internal relays A1 9 Menu Commands toolbar 2 3 Status 8 5 Advanced Instruction icons 2 7 Status dialog screen 8 6 icons 2 5 Upload dialog box 8 23 Micro 1 Micro3C allocation numbers 1 1 Communication Device Number 6 15 configuration 6 3 Download 8 24 Download dialog box 8 24 error causes and actions 2 4 External functions 6 14 Function Area Settings 6 9 Keep functions 6 11 Rese
100. 7 180 187 190 197 M200 M207 210 217 220 227 M230 M237 240 247 250 257 M260 M267 270 277 M280 M287 232 points 40 points Catch Input Relay Standard and high speed M290 M297 8 points 8 points Special Inter nal Relay Standard and high speed M300 M307 M310 M317 16 points 16 points Timer Standard and high speed 0 15 32 points total 16 points total Standard only T16 T31 32 points total 16 points total 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS A1 7 A1 8 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Counter Standard C0 C15 32 points total high speed 16 points total Standard only C16 C31 32 points total 16 points total Shift Register Standard RO R31 64 points 32 points high speed Standard only R32 R63 64 points 32 points Data Register Standard DO D31 100 points 32 points high speed Standard only 032 099 100 points 32 points NOTE Input and output allocation numbers for the expansion station start with 120 and Q20 These input and output allocation numbers are not continuous between the base station and the expansion station in the expansion link sys tem The maximum points shown in are values for the high speed process ing mode The same number cannot be used for a counter and a timer in a user program APPE
101. 8 INDEX XX WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL operands 9 117 Shift G 30 Shift Left SFTL instruction 9 112 ladder diagram 9 114 operands 9 117 Shift Register G 30 bi directional 9 38 instructions 9 33 Shift Register SFR 9 7 Shift Register Not SFRN 9 7 Shift Right SFTR instruction 9 112 ladder diagram 9 116 9 118 operands 9 117 Show Errors option 7 3 troubleshooting tips 7 3 Sign G 30 Significant Digit G 30 Single Output Down SOTD 9 7 instruction 9 20 ladder diagram 9 21 Single Output Up SOTU 9 7 instruction 9 20 ladder diagram 9 21 Single stage Comparison HSCO allocation numbers 9 170 block diagram 9 172 instruction 9 168 ladder diagram 9 169 9 174 operands 9 170 skip 10 28 soft reset special internal relay M315 HSCO 9 171 special internal relay M315 HSC1 INDEX 2000 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX XXI 9 178 operands 9 94 special internal relay M315 HSC2 Repeat Operation 9 99 9 188 repeat operation 9 99 special internal relay M315 HSC3 Surge Suppressor G 31 9 194 Synchronous Shift Register G 31 Software G 30 Synchronous Transmission G 31 software installation 1 7 T recommendations 1 8 Solid State Devices G 30 Table 43 31 SOTD 9 7 9 43 9 46 Tag 3 6 instruction 9 20 Tag Editor 1 2 ladder diagram 9 21 Tag Name 1 2 SOTU 9 7 9 43 9 46 Tag Name Comment search 4 4 instruction 9 20 Tag Name Editor 4 7 ladder diagram 9 21 Ffeld descriptions 4 9 special internal rela
102. 9 109 ladder diagram 9 47 Calendar Read CALR 9 124 Jitter G 19 Calendar Write CALW 9 125 JMP 9 6 9 127 instruction 9 12 9 14 9 45 Clock Read CLKR 9 128 ladder diagram 9 47 Clock Write CLKW 9 129 JMP and JEND Comparison 9 81 9 82 ladder diagram 9 48 Digital Read DGRD 9 143 9 146 Join Rung Display DISP 9 138 9 141 instruction 9 208 Division DIV 9 98 Jump G 19 Double Word Comparison CMP2 Jump JMP 9 6 9 88 instruction 9 12 9 14 9 45 Dual Pulse Reversible Counter ladder diagram 9 47 CNTO 9 29 Jump and Jump End JEND Equal Counter Comparison CC ladder diagram 9 48 9 41 Jump End JEND 9 6 Exclusive OR Word XORW 9 106 instruction 9 12 9 14 9 45 Forward Shift Register SFR 9 35 ladder diagram 9 47 Gate Control HSC3 9 192 Jumper G 19 Greater Than or Equal Counter Comparison CC gt 9 41 L Indirect Move IMOV 9 71 9 73 Indirect Move Not IMOVN 9 78 Ladder Diagram G 19 Jump JMP 9 47 ladder diagram Jump End JEND 9 47 100 msec Timer TIM 9 25 Master Control Reset MCR 9 21 Adding UP Counter CNT2 31 9 44 9 32 Master Control Set MCS 9 21 Addition ADD 9 94 9 96 9 44 Adjust ADJ 9 131 Move MOV 9 58 9 60 Analog Read 0 ANRO 9 147 9 149 Move MOV repeat operation 9 63 Analog To Digital Conversion A D Move Not MOVN 9 65 9 66 9 164 9 165 Multiplication MUL 9 98 And Word ANDW 9 105 Multi stage Comparison HSC1 bi directional shift register 9
103. 9 117 Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1 Source 1 Bit Function Data for bit shift Quantity of bits to shift Q M ee T NN a mm R 2 D Micro 0 99 D 0 498 Micro3C Constant 0 15 Repeat Since the bit shift instructions are executed in each scan while the input is on a pulse input from an SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 118 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Example SFTR MOV 51 D1 REP 29 D20 iil SFTR 51 bit D20 2 M301 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the Micro or Micro C starts operation the move MOV instruction sets 29 to data register D20 Each time input is turned on the 16 bit data of data register D20 is shifted to the right by two bits as designated by operand bit The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M303 Zeros are set to the most significant bit MSB Rotate Left ROTL ROTL 51 bit 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 119 When an input is on the 16 bit data of the data register designated by S1 is rotated to the left by the quantity of bits designated by operand bit The last bit status rotated out of the data register is set to a carry special internal relay M303 When bit t
104. A1 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL M315 715 Sets the internal 100 millisecond clock This is a 100 millisecond clock This spe cial internal relay always generates clock pulses for timers The pulses oscillate at 50 millisecond on and 50 millisecond off R715 will be on only if IR713 is off This is a read only register M316 716 Sets the TMR CNT presets when modi fied This special internal relay will be set when the timer counter presets have been modi fied by the program loader or SFW30 This special internal relay will be reset when the control program is written transferred into the user memory This is a read only register M311 711 Sets the RUN status This special internal relay is always on when the processor is in the run mode This is a read only register APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 0 1004 B Om Cfo Ife 7 wale y WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A1 5 Micro Allocation Numbers The Micro PLC is programmed using operands such as inputs outputs inter nal relays timers counters shift registers and data registers Option Allocation Function Description Inputs Receive input signals through the input termi nals Outputs Q Send the processed results of the user program to the output terminals Internal M Used in the Micro cannot be output to the Relays output terminals Special Inter M Dedicated to specific functions nal
105. AL Hard Reset Selection Input can be used to reset the current value of high speed counter HSC2 LOW Resets the current value when input is turned off HSC2 is enabled while I1 is on HIGH Resets the current value when input I1 is turned on HSC2 is enabled while I1 is off Disables the hard reset Input I1 can be used as an ordinary input Soft Reset Special Internal Relay M315 51 D1 100 M100 M301 is the initialize pulse M301 31 special internal relay In addition to the hard reset using input I1 the current value of the high speed counter can be reset by turning special internal relay M315 on using another input output or internal relay M315 if used must be programmed immedi ately after the HSC instruction as shown above 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 189 Preset Value The preset value can be between 1 and 4 294 967 295 FFFF FFFFh which is designated using a constant or two consecutive data registers The first data regis ter designated by source operand S1 stores the upper digits and the next data register stores the lower digits If the preset value designated by a data register is changed during the high speed counter operation then the high speed counter remains unchanged for that cycle The change will be reflected in the next count cycle after resetting Input Filter The Micro and Micro C have hard and s
106. AM have changed during a power failure this error is detected when power is restored Power Failure Power voltage is lower than the rated power voltage Timer Counter Preset Value Error On starting operation the CRC is executed on the timer counter preset value data stored in the base unit RAM to verify with the stored CRC comparison codes Discrepancies result in a CRC error User Program CRC Error On starting operation the CRC is executed on the user program to verify with the stored CRC comparison codes Discrepancy results in a CRC error Transfer correct program to the PLC User Program Syntax Error This error occurs when a syntax error is found in the user program APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL User Program Writing Error This error is detected when the user program is not correctly written into the base unit memory during program transfer In addition this error is also detected when a memory size other than 1K steps is selected using the FA series program loader WDT Watchdog Timer Error The watchdog timer monitors the time required for one program cycle to detect abnormal repeating operation functions It then alarms if the processing is not completed in a specific period of time Micro and Micro C Error Codes Operating Status Output and Error Indicators Error Items Operating Output Error Checked St
107. An expression of relationships between logic func tions 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 8 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Boot The process of loading a program into the com puter and bringing it up on the screen BPS Abbr Bits Per Second Bounce Filter The electronic circuitry used to eliminate the effects of contact bounces within a mechanical switching device Branch An instruction which then executed may cause the arithmetic and control unit to obtain the next instruction from some location other than the next sequential location See JUMP 2 A point in a program where there may be alternative paths of instructions Bridge Rectifier A full wave rectifier that conducts current in only one direction of the input signal current AC voltage applied to the input results in the approxi mate DC voltage at the output BTU Abbr British Thermal Unit Buffer A storage device for temporally holding of data Alternately can also be defined as a circuit inserted between circuits to perform an isolating function Bus A channel wire or line along which data can be sent or received e g Address bus or Data bus GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 9 Byte A group of adjacent bits usually eight 8 oper ated on as a unit Cartridge Tapeloader magnetic tape recording playback device for Recorder entering or storing programs data or both
108. Analog read 1 2 16 and 24 point types only Pulse and 91 PULS Pulse output 3 Am 92 PWM Pulse width 3 vil Conversion Micro modulation base units 93 A D Analog to digital 2 conversion High HSCO High speed 4 Speed counter 0 32 bits Counter 2 HSCI High speed 2 counter 1 32 bits All Micro A3 HSC2 High speed 4 base units counter 2 32 bits A4 HSC3 High speed 2 counter 3 16 bits Commu B1 TXD Transmit Depends the data 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 54 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Structure of an Advanced Instruction The source operand specifies the 16 bit word data to be processed by the advanced instruction Some advanced instructions require two source operands Repeat Designation Destination Operand Source Operand H IO repeat designation specifies whether the repeat is used for the operand or not Repeat Designation MOV SIR DIR REP Op Code Repeat Cycles Input Condition for Advanced Instructions Almost all advanced instructions must be preceded by a contact except no opera tion NOP and high speed counter HSCO H C3 instructions The input con dition can be programmed using a bit operand such as input output internal relay or shift register Timers and counters can also be used as input conditions to turn on the contact when the timer times out or the counter counts out While t
109. Another use would be to add a delay to the Micro or Micro C scan time in order to simulate communication with a machine or application for debugging purposes Right Mouse Insert Selecting Insert gt adds a ladder line column or rung before the current rung in your ladder program Click on the position before which you wish to insert the ladder instruction A gray box will highlight this area 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 207 Then select Insert gt Ladder Line to add a ladder line before the area which is highlighted by the gray box Select Insert gt Column to add a column before the area which is highlighted by the gray box Select Insert gt Rung to add a rung before the area which is highlighted by the gray box Right Mouse Append Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Append gt adds an attached ladder line col umn or rung after the current rung in your ladder program Click on the position after which you wish to append the ladder instruction A gray box will highlight this area Then select Append gt Ladder Line to add a ladder line after the area which is highlighted by the gray box Select Append gt Column to add a column after the area which is highlighted by the gray box Select Append gt Rung to add a rung after the area which is highlighted by the gray box Right Mouse Delete Selecting Delete gt removes a ladder line column or rung f
110. C selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option Two types of shift registers are available forward SFR and reverse SFRN A total of 64 bits are allocated to RO through R63 in the standard processing mode In the high speed processing mode 32 bits are available for the shift register allo cated to RO through R31 Any number of available bits can be selected to form a train of bits which store the on or off status The on off data of constituent bits is shifted in the forward direction forward shift register or in the reverse direction reverse shift register when a pulse input is turned on Forward Shift Register SFR When SER instructions are programmed two addresses are always required Enter the SFR instruction followed by a shift register number selected from the appropriate operand numbers The shift register number corresponds to the first bit The number of bits is the second required address after the SFR instruction 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 35 The SFR instruction requires three inputs The forward shift register circuit must be programmed in the following order Reset input returns the value of each bit to zero 2 Pulse input triggers the data to shift upon the leading edge of a pulse 3 Data input the information shifte
111. C2A C24B1 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 142 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL gt Digital Read DGRD Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Interface gt Digital Read DGRD displays the Digital Read DGRD dialog box You may also click the toolbar button n 4 ol Tou Tit Tay Hone Comac In the DGRD field click the circle of the appropriate selection either BCD for binary coded decimal conversion or BIN for binary conversion Enter the quantity of digits to be digitally read from the interface in the white field below BIN Enter the appropriate tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field The data in I is the first input number read The data in Q is the first output number for the digital selection The data in D1 is the destination operand Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 143 Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate the digital read instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the digital read instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The r
112. CMP2 instruction is only available with the Micro C Data can be compared using comparison instructions such as equal to unequal to less than greater than less than or equal to and greater than or equal to When the comparison result is true an output or internal relay is turned on The repeat operation can also be used to compare more than one set of data Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Comparison gt Equal To CMP displays the Compare Equal CMP dialog box You may also click the toolbar button Sar DR TET Ta P s EE ni REF 5 OF Eyal Tu nmo Equal Te m m 3 Lea Then Romx Repa D ramer 1 han O Lass Thon oi Equal S fani Than Equip 5 Drala 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 80 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 5 In the Type field click the circle of the appropriate selection Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper S1 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper S2 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat The data in 52 is compared against the data in 51 Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper D1 field Then enter
113. CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 29 Block Check Character BCC The Micro C has an automatic BCC calculation function to detect any commu nication error in incoming data If a BCC code is designated in the receive for mat of an RXD instruction then the Micro C calculates a BCC value for a specified starting position through the position immediately preceding BCC It then compares the calculation result with the BCC code in the received incom ing data The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through fifteenth byte The BCC calculated in either XOR or ADD can be one or two digits When an end delimiter is not used in the RXD instruction the BCC code must be positioned at the end of the receive format designated in the Source 1 S1 operand When an end delimiter is used the BCC code must be immediately before or after the end delimiter The Micro C reads a specified number of BCC digits in the incoming data according to the receive format to calculate and com pare the received BCC code with the BCC calculation results BCC Calculation Start Position The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through fifteenth byte The BCC is calculated for the range starting from the designated position up to the byte immediately before the BCC of the receive data 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 30 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL
114. Cascade A group of registers arranged in succession so that each segment is derived from or acts on the preced ing register Central Processing Unit The component of the PLC often referred to as CPU the processor that contains the primary memory performs math and logic operations and executes the user s program Channel A path for electrical transmission of signals between two or more points Character A symbol such as a letter or number that repre sents information Checksum The sum of a group of data items associated with the group for checking purposes Clear To return the contents in a storage registers unit to zero Clock A pulse generator which synchronizes the timing of various logic circuits and memory in the proces sor CPU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 10 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Coaxial Cable A cable consisting of an outer conductor concen tric to an inner conductor separated from each other by a dielectric material Code A system of symbols bits used to represent data characters Computer Interface A device designed for data communications between a central computer and a programmable logic controller PLC Conditional Jump A jump instruction that is subject to the result of a comparison made within the program Copy To read data from a source leaving the source data unchanged and to write the same data else where in a form that may differ from
115. Counters C10 and up will be reset SFR Keep Shift register bits are cleared in the event of a power failure It is possible however to designate a range of shift register bits to retain their types when the program is restarted Use this field to designate a range of shift register bits which will keep their current status while others are cleared when the program is restarted The Clear option also the default setting clears all of the current shift register bits upon power up when there has been a power failure Click the circle to the left of the option to select it The Keep option designates all shift registers in use to keep their sta tus when there is a power failure Thus upon power up the shift register bits will retain their states either 0 or 1 Click the circle to the left of the option to select it The Keep to option retains the shift register bits upon power up of all registers prior to the number entered in the accompanying field Click the circle to the left of the option to select it Then enter the appropriate register bit number in the field to the right For example if R100 is entered then shift registers RO R100 will retain their current states upon power up Shift registers R101 and up will be reset 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 14 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL External Functions Activating this option displays the current timer values or the counted counter
116. D1 field Destination operand 1 D1 serves as the beginning of the data register When D1 is set the Macro instruction looks at the length of S1 to set D2 Once information is entered in the D1 field or once an instruction is selected from the S1 field two more white fields display below the D1 instruction The middle field displays the allocation number of D1 Enter a tag name in the lower field D2 Originally when no instructions are entered only one white field dis plays below the D2 field Destination operand 2 D2 serves as the ending of the data register Once information is entered in the D1 field or once an instruction is selected from the S1 field then the correspond ing information displays in the D2 field 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 201 Insert To create a new macro click the Insert button The Data Type Selec tion dialog box will display nmm TE Ippa i inntar Characins E Constan Hox toni In the Type field click the circle to the left of the desired option either Constant Character or Constant Hex decimal Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to save the data type To back out of this dialog box without selecting a data type click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 2
117. DITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 61 Repeat Operation in the Move Instructions When the source S is designated with a repeat as many operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S1 are moved to the destination As a result only the last of the source operands is moved to the destination Source Destination Repeat Repeat 12 20 21 2 When the destination D is designated with a repeat the source operand desig MOV SIR DI D10 D20 nated with 51 is moved to all destination operands as many as repeat cycles starting with the destination designated by D1 Source Destination MOV 81 DIR REP Repeat O Repeat 3 I3 10 D20 3 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 62 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When both S and D are designated with a repeat as many operands as repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S1 are moved to the same quan tity of operands starting with the operand designated by D1 Source Destination MOV SIR DIR REP Repeat 3 Repeat 3 14 D10 D20 3 The move MOV instruction moves 16 bit word data When a bit operand such as an input output internal relay or shift register is designated as the source or destination operand 16 bits starting with the one designated by S1 or D1 are the target data If a repeat operation is designated for a bit operand
118. Data Type Digits Bytes Constant 00h FFh No conversion 1 7Fh Data 0 0498 Binary to ASCII 1 4 1 99 repeat Register Binary to BCD to 1 5 ASCII No conversion 1 2 BCC Binary to ASCII 1 2 XOR No conversion 1 2 calculation ADD calculation 1 15 calcu lation start position 1O TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 11 Designating Constant as S1 When a constant value is designated as source operand 51 one byte data is trans mitted without conversion The valid transmit data value depends on the data bits selected in the FUNS loader port communication mode setting When eight data bits are selected 00h FFh is transmitted When seven data bits are selected as the default 00h 7Fh is transmitted Constant values are entered in hexadeci mal notation into the source data Designating Data Register as S1 When a data register is designated as source operand 1 conversion types and transmit digits must also be designated The data stored in the designated data register is converted and a designated quantity of digits of the resulting data is transmitted Conversion types are available in binary to ASCII binary to BCD to ASCII and no conversion When a repeat is designated the data of as many data registers as repeat cycles are transmitted starting with the designated data register Up to 99 repeat cycles can be used 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANS
119. EFERENCE MANUAL Address An identifying number which represents a location in the processor s memory This number can also relate to the location of an 1 0 Algorithm A prescribed set of rules for the solution of a prob lem in a definite number of steps i e An algorithm for PID Alphanumeric Used to identify a character set or data which con sists of both letters and numbers Alternating Current AC An electric current in which the charge flow reverses direction at recurring intervals Ambient Compensation The design of an instrument such that changes in ambient temperature do not effect the readings of the instrument Ambient Temperature temperature within an encompassed atmo sphere Ampere amp A unit of electrical current One 1 ampere is the current which flows through one 1 ohm of resis tance at one 1 volt potential Analog Of or pertaining to the general class of devices in which the output varies as a continuous function of the input GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 3 Analog Data Data represented in a continuous form as con trasted with digital data represented in a discrete discontinuous form Analog data is usually repre sented by physical variables e g voltage resis tance rotation etc Analog Input Module device which converts an analog signal from a user s device into a digital signal for use by the pro
120. EIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 27 Designating a Constant as an End Delimiter Program an end delimiter anywhere other than the first byte in the receive format of an RXD instruction The Micro C will recognize the end of valid communi cation Even so RXD instructions without end delimiters can also be executed When a constant value is designated anywhere other than the first byte of source operand 51 the one byte data serves as an end delimiter to end the processing of the received data The valid end delimiter value depends on the data bits selected in the FUN8 loader port communication mode setting When eight data bits are selected end delimiters can be 00h FFh When seven data bits are selected as the default end delimiters can be 00h 7Fh Constant values are entered in hexa decimal notation into the source data If a character in the incoming data matches the end delimiter then the RXD instruction stops receiving data at this point and starts the subsequent receive processing as specified Even if a character matches the end delimiter at a posi tion earlier than expected the RXD instruction stops receiving data there If a BCC code is included in the receive format of an RXD instruction then an end delimiter can be positioned immediately before or after the BCC code If a data register or skip is designated between the BCC and the end delimiter then correct receiving is not ensured
121. END 9 45 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Program Flow End END 9 49 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions 9 50 Structure of an Advanced Instruction 9 54 Input Condition for Advanced Instructions 9 54 Source and Destination Operands 9 55 Using a Timer or Counter as a Source Operand 9 55 Using a Timer or a Counter as Destination Operand 9 56 Right Mouse gt Advanced Instructions Move Move 9 57 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Move Move Not 9 64 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Move Indirect Move IMOV 9 69 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Move Indirect Move Not IMOVN 9 74 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Comparison 9 78 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Binary Arithmetic 9 92 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Boolean Computation 9 103 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Bit Shift and Rotate 9 112 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Real time Clock Calendar 9 122 2001 IDEC CORPORATION TABLE OF CONTENTS VI WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Interface 9 137 Display DISP 9 137 Digital Read DGRD 9 142 gt Analog Read 0 ANRO 9 146 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Pulse and A D Conversion 9 149 gt Pulse Output PULS 9 150 gt Pulse Width Modulation PWM 9 156 gt Analog To Digital Conversion A D 9 163 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions High Speed Counter 9 165 Single stage Comparison 5 0 9 168 gt Multi stage Comparison HSC1 9 175 gt Pulse Output Control HSC2 9
122. Example Received data consists of 17 bytes plus two BCC digits 1 Calculation Start Position 1 lst 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th tt BCC calculation range 4 BCC two digits 2 Calculation Start Position 2 Ist 2nd 3rd 4th Sth 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th ears gt BCC calculation range BCC digits 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 31 BCC Calculation Formula The BCC calculation formula can be selected from either the exclusive OR XOR or the addition ADD operation Example Incoming data consist of 41h 42h 43h 44h and 45h 1 BCC Calculation Formula XOR 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 41h 2 BCC Calculation Formula ADD 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 14Fh to 4Fh Only last one or two digits are used as BCC Conversion Type The result of the BCC calculation can be converted or not according to the designated conversion type as described below Example The result of the BCC calculation is 0041h 1 Binary gt ASCII conversion 4 4 4 1 cs Binary ASCII conversion 34h 31h NL 4 two digits 2 No conversion o 0041h No conversion 00h 41h D two digits 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 32 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL BCC Digits Bytes The quantity of digits bytes of the BCC code can be selected from 1 or 2 Example BCC Digits 2
123. HIGH 1000 301 31 10 10 Pulse input n Hard reset input HSCO is reset when I1 is on because the hard reset is set to HIGH 110 Soft reset input to turn on soft reset special internal relay M315 M301 is the initialize pulse special internal relay used to turn on the soft reset special internal relay M315 at start up While hard reset input is off the HSCO instruction counts input pulses to input I0 When the current value reaches 1000 output QO is turned on When hard reset input or soft reset input 110 is turned on the HSCO current value is reset to zero 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 175 gt Multi stage Comparison HSC1 Selecting Advanced Instructions gt High speed Counter gt Multi stage Com parison HSC1 displays the Multi stage Comparison HSC1 dialog box You may also click the toolbar button ese Hulli ctaye Comparienn inn High or Disable This selection is used to reset the current value of 5 In the HSCI field click the circle of the appropriate selection Low the high speed counter 1 Enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Then enter the associated operands in the Allocation Number field below The S1 fields indicate the source of the multi stage preset data comparison Finally optionally enter any
124. HSC3 overflow M317 In operation output Cleared Cleared NOTE M290 M297 and M301 are used only for reading in the user program How ever these can be directly set or reset using the program loader or WindLDR M307 Link Communication Initialize Flag Master Station Link Communication Stop Flag Slave Station Special internal relay M307 has different functions when used as a base or expan sion station in the expansion link system or when used as a master station or slave station in the data link system Base or master station Link communication initialize flag When M307 at the base or master station is turned on during operation the link configuration is checked to initialize the expansion or data link system When an expansion station or slave station is powered up after the base or master station turn M307 on to initialize the link system After an expansion link or data link setup is changed M307 must also be turned on to ensure correct communication APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 0 1004 B Om Cfo Ife 7 wale y WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 1 21 Slave station Link communication stop flag When a slave station does not receive communication data from the master station for 800 msec or more in the data link system M307 turns on When the slave station receives correct communication data M307 turns off In the expansion station M307 has no effect Data Register Allocation Numbers Avail
125. INE MENU 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 11 NOTE For January through September enter 0 first For example enter 03 to denote March Time The current time H H MM SS AM or PM displays in this field Click on the hour minute second or AM PM Then enter the new digits to correct each individually Protect Status Use this field to protect your PLC from reading from and or writing to a ladder program Ifa user program is write or read write protected then it cannot be changed without the password To protect a user program first transfer it from either the program loader or the PC If the accompanying field displays UNPROTECTED then click the Change gt gt button to display the Protect Status dialog box 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 12 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Complete the following fields Then click the Enable button to establish protection Once you return to the PLC Status Dialog screen the Protect Status field will display PROTECTED To back out of this option without setting up protection status click the Disable button To access on line help press the Help button IMPORTANT Password Enter a password of one to four digits using the 0 9 and keys Make sure to note this password Future changes in protect status can not be made without it Protect type Select one of the following two protection modes Disable P
126. ION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 10 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Basic Instructions Normally Closed Selecting Basic Instructions Normally Closed displays the Normally Closed LODN dialog box You may also click the toolbar button lpp 171 Open oF s nen NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option Use the Load Not LODN instruction before an operand starting at the left bus of the ladder diagram The LODN instruction starts the logical operation with a normally closed NC contact The following chart provides all normally closed LODN operands 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 11 Instruction Standard High Speed 000 035 000 015 000 031 000 011 000 317 000 047 290 297 300 317 000 031 000 015 000 031 000 015 000 063 000 031 the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field 5 Accept the default Normally Closed in the Type field Then enter Next enter the appropriate operand in the Allocation Number field Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters
127. Interrupt FA3S CP12 amp CP13 INDEX 2000 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX IX 6 17 Help option 9 3 Function Area Settings option 3 6 6 8 Help screens 1 5 Hexadecimal G 17 G High Speed Counter a HSC0 output delay 9 173 Gate Control HSC3 instructions 9 165 allocation numbers 9 193 specifications 9 167 block diagram 9 195 Horizontal line option 9 4 gate input 9 194 9 196 HSCO hard reset selection 9 194 allocation numbers 9 170 input filter and input frequency block diagram 9 172 9 195 instruction 9 168 instruction 9 191 ladder diagram 9 169 9 174 ladder diagram 9 192 operands 9 170 operands 9 194 output delay 9 173 gate input soft reset special internal relay M315 Gate Control HSC3 9 194 9 196 9 171 Graphics G 16 HSCI Greater Than allocation numbers 9 177 instruction 9 78 allocation numbers numeric and Greater Than or Equal CC gt symbolic 9 180 instruction 9 39 instruction 9 175 ladder diagram 9 41 ladder diagram 9 176 9 182 Greater Than or Equal gt 1 multi stage data setting 9 179 instruction 9 78 operands 9 177 Grey Code G 16 output delay 9 181 soft reset special internal relay M315 9 178 5 2 allocation numbers 9 187 block diagram 9 190 instruction 9 185 ladder diagram 9 186 operands 9 187 output delay 9 191 soft reset special internal relay M315 Half Duplex G 16 Hard Copy G 17 hard reset selection Gate Control HSC3 9 194 Hardware G 17 ha
128. J The 16 and 24 point type Micro and Micro C base units feature five real time calendar and clock instructions used for programming the calendar and clock These instructions cannot be used on the 10 point type base unit After the initial 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 123 setting of the calendar and clock using FUN28 the date and time are main tained If control data registers D95 through D98 are enabled using FUN10 the day of week hour minute and second data can be read out to these data regis ters when the Micro or Micro C base unit is running or stopped Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Real time Clock Calendar gt Calendar Read CALR displays the Calendar Read CALR dialog box You may also click the toolbar button E Arad C A lp Tag Haar Camda n Head O Chenier wiin Munhrr C Check Reri Tan Hane O Chok Wika Tamra D x 3 Help 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 124 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL In the Type field click the circle of the appropriate selection Enter the appropriate tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field below The clock or calendar data is read to four data registers begin ning with this one Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name
129. LDR Technical Support Registered users of IDEC s WindLDR software are entitled to telephone support To qualify complete the enclosed registration card and return it to IDEC For assistance call 1 800 262 IDEC 4332 extension 7526 to contact the PLC Technical Engineering Group To contact us through E mail write to support idec com via the Internet 1 INTRODUCTION 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 1 7 Installing WindLDR Software The WindLDR software is supplied on CD ROM and is accessed from the PC after installing the files onto the hard disk The WindLDR destination directory name is configurable but defaults to Program Files idec WindLDR3 0 This directory holds all of the executable files 3 To install the WindLDR software 1 Insert the CD ROM into the PC s CD ROM drive 2 In Windows 95 98 2000 and NT 4 0 click the Start gt Run from the task bar 3 Enter D setup exe in the Run dialog box The D indicates the CD ROM drive Your PC s CD ROM drive may be designated by another letter A series of screens will display to walk you through the installation procedures 4 When prompted for the destination directory you can use the default directory C Program Files idec WindLDR4 0 or enter another destination directory for the installation files The system creates the IDEC WindLDR directory automatically To activate the WindLDR configuration software create a
130. MANUAL S1 S2 gt D1 CY ADD SI R S2 R DI R REP When an input is on 16 bit word data designated by source operands 51 and 52 are added The result is set to destination operand D1 and carry M303 Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1 52 D1 Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1 I 0 35 0 35 Q 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 317 0 317 0 287 T 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 R 0 63 0 63 0 63 D Micro 0 99 0 99 0 99 D 0 498 0 498 0 498 Micro C Constant 0 65535 0 65535 Repeat 1 31 1 31 1 31 When timer T or counter C is used as S1 or S2 the current value of the timer counter is read out 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 95 When T or C is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 9999 NOTE When using the timer or counter as a destination make sure that the data does not exceed the maximum preset value of 9999 When the preset value exceeds 9999 a user program execution error will result turning on error indicator ERRI and special internal relay M304 When a user program execution error occurs the result is not set to the destination Since the binary arithmetic instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Using Carry or Borrow Flags
131. MANUAL 9 177 Normally Closed LODN 9 10 Normally Open LOD 9 8 Output OUT 9 13 Output Not OUTN 9 15 Pulse Output PULS 9 151 Pulse Output Control HSC2 9 187 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 9 158 Receive RXD 10 19 Reset RST 9 18 Rotate Left ROTL 9 119 Rotate Right ROTR 9 119 Set SET 9 16 Shift Left SFTL 9 117 Shift Right SFTR 9 117 Single stage Comparison HSCO 9 170 Transmit TXD 10 8 Opto Isolator G 23 OR 9 6 G 23 Or OR 9 6 Or Load OR LOD 9 6 OR LOD 9 6 instruction 9 42 Or Not ORN 9 7 OR Word ORW instruction 9 103 ladder diagram 9 106 operands 9 107 repeat operation 9 108 ORN 9 7 ORW instruction 9 103 ladder diagram 9 106 operands 9 107 INDEX 2000 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX XVII repeat operation 9 108 OUT 9 7 9 43 9 46 instruction 9 12 operands 9 13 OUTN 9 7 9 43 9 46 instruction 9 14 operands 9 15 Output G 24 Output OUT 9 7 instruction 9 12 operands 9 13 output address 9 12 Output Coil set reset 8 20 output delay High Speed Counter 5 0 9 173 Multi stage Comparison HSC1 9 181 Pulse Output Control HSC2 9 191 Output Devices G 24 output frequency Pulse Output PULS 9 152 Output Not OUTN 9 7 instruction 9 14 operands 9 15 output pulse width ratio Pulse Width Modulation PWM 9 159 Overflow G 24 Parallel Operation G 24 Parallel Output G 24 Parity Bit G 24 Parit
132. MIT RECEIVE 10 12 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Conversion Type The transmit data is converted according to the designated conversion type as described below 1 Binary gt ASCII conversion I C st Binary gt ASCII conversion 30h 30h 30h 43h When transmitting four digits 2 Binary gt BCD gt ASCII conversion D10 Binary 2 BCD conversion 0 0 0 1 2 30h 80h 80h 31h 2h BCD ASCII conversion When transmitting five digits 3 No conversion FF l D10 000Ch No conversion 00h 0Ch When transmitting two digits 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 13 Transmit Digits Bytes After conversion the transmit data is taken out in specified digits Possible digits depend on the selected conversion type Example D10 stores 000Ch 12 and is converted in binary to BCD to ASCII 1 Transmit Digits 2 owe Binary gt BCD binary gt ASCII conversion 0 OP 0 2 31h 32h 30h 30h 30h 31h 32h Lowest two digits Intermediate result of conversion 2 Transmit Digits 1 Binary gt BCD binary gt ASCII conversion 2 a 0 OP o 1 2 32h 30h 80h 30h 31h 32h Lowest one digit Intermediate result of conversion Repeat Cycles When
133. MIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 5 which will display the 51 field of the Transmit TXD dialog box 5 In the Character or Hex decimal field enter the character data Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to save the data To back out of this dialog box without selecting a data click the Cancel button If the Variable Data register option is selected in the Type field of the Data Type Selection dialog box then the Variable Data register dialog box will display OF te ASCII BED in HEP fr Y Help 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 6 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Enter the tag name or nickname the upper Data register No gt field Then enter the allocation number in the middle field Optionally enter any associated comments in the lower field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maxi mum of four lines Click the circle to the left of the appropriate Conversion Type option either BIN to ASCII BCD to ASCII or None Enter the number of digits to convert in the Digits field Finally enter the number of repeats for this variable in the REP field Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to save the variable To back out of this dialog box without selecting a variable click the Cancel button To access on
134. N WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A2 9 40h Keep Data Sum Check Error Keep Data Sum This error indicates that the data designated to be maintained during power fail ure is broken because of memory backup failure Clear the error code using FUN20 on the program loader Note that the keep data of internal relays and shift registers is cleared when the error code is cleared 80h User Program Syntax Error Syntax This error indicates that the user program has a syntax error or that FUN1 through FUN10 are set incorrectly Correct the user program or FUN settings and transfer the corrected user program to Micro The error code is cleared when a correct user program is transferred When this error occurs the error message is displayed with a type code and an address code of seven digits total 100h User Program Writing Error EEPROM NG This error indicates a failure of writing into the Micro or Micro C base unit EEPROM when transferring a user program or when setting user program pro tection The error code is cleared when writing into the EEPROM is completed correctly If this error occurs frequently the Micro or Micro C base unit should be replaced 200h Protect Output Overload Error Transistor NG This error is issued when a protect transistor output is overloaded during opera tion In this case only the overloaded output is forced off When this error occurs at the base station in the expansion link system err
135. N M304 RST ENTER Master Error Lists for All PLCs Ladder to Mnemonic Error List These errors codes occur during the compilation of a ladder file Error 000 Vertical line not properly connected at the top A line must be connected to either another line a coil or a power rail Error 001 Vertical line not properly connected at the bottom A line must be connected to either another line a coil or a power rail Error 002 Dot properly connected on the left An instruction or line must be connected to either another line a coil or a power rail Error 003 Dot properly connected on the right An instruction or line must be connected to either another line a coil or a power rail APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 2 15 Error 004 Rung has more than one CNT SFR Only one counter or shift register is allowed on each rung Error 005 is not on the main line Some instructions such as a counter must be placed on the first line of a rung Error 006 Sub rung is empty Some instructions such as a counter require multiple inputs outputs Error 007 A short circuit ends at WindLDR gives the approximate location of each end of the short circuit A short circuit occurs when a path length is zero A path is created by the connection of lines in a rung A short circuit occurs when a horizontal ladder li
136. NDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 0 1004 B Om Cfo Ife JWa eh WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Micro Special Internal Relays IR Number Function Description MSO Initialize When Micro starts operation M301 turns Pulse on for a period of one scan M302 All Outputs When M302 is turned on all outputs OFF Q0 Q31 go off until M302 is turned off Self maintaining circuits using outputs also go off and are not restored when M302 is turned off M303 Carry Cy When a carry or borrow results from exe and cuting an addition or subtraction instruc Borrow Bw tion M303 turns on M303 is also used for the bit shift and rotate instructions M304 User Program When an error occurs while executing a Execution user program M304 turns on Error M305 Link Com When an error occurs during communica munication tion in the expansion link system or in the Error data link system M305 turns on The M305 status is maintained when the error is cleared and remains on until M305 is reset using the program loader 2001 APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 1 9 1 10 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL M306 Link Com When M306 is turned on at the base or munication master station in the expansion link system Prohibit Flag or the data link system communication is stopped The M306 status is maintained when Micro is turned off and remains on until M306 is reset using the
137. NDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL NOTE If time is assigned a value which is not within the range specified above invalid data will result in a user program execution error Internal relay M304 turns on and the ERRI indicator on the Micro or Micro C base unit also turns on The error code is stored in data register D93 when the control data register is enabled using FUN10 Operands Possible Function Source to write the clock data Operand D 0 99 for Micro 0 498 for Micro C Since the CLKW instruction is executed at the rising edge of the input a pulse input from an SOTU or SOTD instruction is not required Example CLKW D1 REP D60 81 15 301 D1 REP D61 MOV Si 30 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 131 M301 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the Micro or Micro C starts operation the MOV instructions set clock data to data registers D60 through D62 D60 Hour 15 D61 Minute 30 D62 Second 0 When input 3 is turned on the clock is set using data from data registers D60 through D62 NOTE Clock data can also be set using FUN28 Adjust ADJ ADJ zal The Adjust ADJ instruction synchronizes the Micro or Micro C internal clock with another established clock for precise timing When an input is turned on the clock is adjusted with respect to secon
138. No conversion conversion 00h 41h NL 4 two digits BCC Digits Bytes The quantity of digits bytes of the BCC code can be selected from 1 or 2 Example DEVIG 4 4 1 34h 315 34h 31h Transmit Completion Output Designate an output QO through Q31 or internal relay MO through M287 as an operand for the transmit completion output 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 18 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When the start input for a TXD instruction is turned on preparation for trans mission is initiated followed by data transmission When the sequence of all transmission operations is complete the designated output or internal relay is turned on Transmit Status Designate a data register DO through D497 as the operand to store the transmit status information including a transmission status code and a user communica tion error code To view the transmit status monitor the designated data register in hexadecimal notation on the program loader Transmission Status Code Code Status Description 1 Preparing From the point when the start input for a transmission instruction is turned on until the transmit data is stored in the internal transmit buffer 2 Transmitting From the point when the data transmission is data enabled by an END processing until all data transmission is completed 3 Data From the
139. Output QO E S1 S2 gt 01 lt gt SI R S2 R DI R REP When an input is on 16 bit word data designated by source operands 51 and S2 are compared When 51 data is not equal to S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off S1 lt S2 gt D1 on CMP SI R S2 R DI R REP When an input is on 16 bit word data designated by source operands 51 and 52 are compared When 51 data is less than S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 84 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL S1 gt S2 gt 01 on When input is on 16 bit word data designated by source operands 51 and 52 CMP gt SI R S2 R DI R REP compared When 51 data is greater than 52 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off S1 lt S2 gt Dion CMP SI R S2 R DI R REP When an input is on 16 bit word data designated by source operands 51 and 52 are compared When 51 data is less than or equal to 52 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off S1 gt S2 gt Dion gt SI R S2 R DI R REP When an input
140. Points 1 1 1 1 Phase Single Single Single Single Maximum 10 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz Frequency 4 kHz when using a pro gram loader NOTE The input response frequency of the high speed counter depends on the hard filter setting The soft filter does not affect the high speed counter function 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 168 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL gt Single stage Comparison HSCO Selecting Advanced Instructions gt High speed Counter Single stage Com parison HSCO displays the Single stage Comparison HSCO dialog box HSCco You may also click the toolbar button 155 Tag Nar race mm Alea 7 Humber inse Tuy Cremmer _ 5 In the HSCO field click the circle of the appropriate selection Low High or Disable This selection is used to reset the current value of the high speed counter 0 Enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name fields Then enter the associated operands in the Allocation Number fields below The S1 fields indicate the preset value The D1 fields indicate the high speed counter output Finally optionally enter any associated comments in the Tag Name Comment fields This reference may be a maximum of six charac ters per line for a maximum of four lines 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 169 Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate t
141. Relays Timers T Used in the user program available in 100 msec 10 msec and 1 msec timers Counters Used the user program available revers ible counters and adding counters Shift R Registers to shift the data bits according to Registers pulse inputs Data D Registers used to store numerical data some Registers are dedicated to special functions Available I O numbers depend on the type and combination of the Micro base units used in the expansion link system 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Allocation Table for the Micro Operand Processing Allocation Maximum Points Mode Number Input Standard 10 17 14 points base 14 high speed 110 115 points expansion Standard only 120 127 14 points base 14 130 135 points expansion Output Standard and Q0 Q7 10 points base 10 high speed Q10 Q11 points expansion Standard only 020 027 10 points base 10 Q30 Q31 points expansion Internal Relay Standard and 0 7 232 points 40 points high speed M10 M17 M20 M27 M30 M37 M40 M47 Standard only 50 57 232 points 40 points M60 M67 M70 M77 M80 M87 M90 M97 M100 M107 M110 M117 M120 M127 M130 M137 APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Internal Relay continued Standard only 140 147 150 157 M160 M167 170 17
142. Then enter the appropriate internal relay number in the field to the right For example if M100 is entered then internal relays MO M100 will retain their current states upon power up Internal relays M101 and up will be reset Counter Keep Counter values are cleared in the event of a power failure It is possible however to designate some counters to retain their current count when the program is restarted Use this field to designate a range of incremental counters which will keep the current count while others are cleared when the program is restarted The All Clear option also the default setting clears the current count of all the counters upon power up when there has been a power failure Click the circle to the left of the option to select it The All Keep option designates all counters in use to keep their counts when there is a power failure Thus upon power up the count values of counters will remain the same Click the circle to the left of the option to select it The Keep to option retains the counted values upon power up of all counters prior to the counter entered in the accompanying field Click the circle to the left of the option to select it Then enter the appropri 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 13 ate counter number in the field to the right For example if C9 is entered then counters CO C9 will retain their current states upon power up
143. a con tact This error tells the user that a short circuit bypasses or goes around the given address Error 011 The left power rail is shorted to the right power rail The ladder line requires an input or output equivalent instruction Error 4012 This is an illegal branch WindLDR does not support rungs of this format Error 4012 This error occurs because the user cannot branch in and out continued of an AND or LOD AND connection The example above shows that this error occurs between 1002 and 1003 This error may also occur if attempting to use Bit Push BPS Bit Read BRD or Bit Pop instructions with a PLC that does not support them such as the FA series PLCs currently 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2 18 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Error 013 is not followed by OUT instruction This instruction also requires an output equivalent instruc tion The user can be given possible output equivalent instruc tions which can be used depending on their desired opera tions Output equivalent instructions which can be used are OUT CNT SFR SFRN MCS SET RST and JMP Error 014 is not preceded by LOD instruction This instruction also requires an input equivalent instruc tion The user can be given possible input equivalent instructions which can be used depending on their desired operations Input equivalent instructio
144. able data registers are limited in the high speed processing mode or in the data link system configuration Some data registers are allocated to special func tions in the data link system as shown below For the data link function refer to the Micro Users Manual 0100 0209 D492 and D493 have special func tions in the modem mode Standard Processing Mode Data Other than Data Link Data Link High Register Data Link Master Slave Speed Number Station Station Processing Mode DO D31 Available Available Available Available D32 D59 Available Available Available Not available D60 D84 Available For data link Available Not available D85 D89 Available For data link For data link Not available D90 D99 Can be designated as control data registers Not available using FUN 10 note D100 Available Not available D483 2001 APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 1 22 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL D484 When expansion control data register service Not available D4 i 4 is enabled for each group of these data regis ters using D499 the selected data registers work as expansion control data registers others can be used as ordinary data registers When expansion control data register service is disabled using D499 these data registers can be used as ordinary data registers D486 See 0484 0485 Not available D491 D492 See
145. ach desired option If the Default button is pressed no register settings are selected The control data registers are divided into ten groups The following table explains the functionality of each Function Data Data in Control Data Register Register Base Unit D90 Micro Micro C base unit system code System Code Bit 1 24 I O Bit 2 16 I O Bit 4 10 I O Bit 8 AC input type Bit 16 Protect source output type 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Current Value Base Unit D91 Micro Micro C base unit processing Processing Mode Code mode code 0 Standard processing mode 1 High speed processing mode General Error D92 Refer to your PLC s hardware manual for Code complete information User Program D93 Refer to your PLC s hardware manual for Execution Error Code complete information Link Com D94 Refer to your PLC s hardware manual for munication lete infi Error Godo complete information Day of Week D95 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday Hour Clock D96 0 to 23 Minute Clock D97 0 to 59 Second Clock D98 0 to 59 Scan Time D99 Current scan time in msec 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 30 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL To ensure that the control data registers are correct complete the following steps 5 1 Click on
146. adder diagram 9 37 Right Justified G 28 right mouse button 1 2 9 1 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX XIX ROM G 28 Rotate Left ROTL instruction 9 112 ladder diagram 9 118 operands 9 119 Rotate Right ROTR instruction 9 112 ladder diagram 9 120 9 121 operands 9 119 ROTL instruction 9 112 ladder diagram 9 118 operands 9 119 ROTR instruction 9 112 ladder diagram 9 120 9 121 operands 9 119 Routine G 28 RS 232 C G 28 RS 422 G 28 RST 9 7 9 43 9 46 instruction 9 18 operands 9 18 Rung G 28 Rung Comment Dialog screen 4 6 9 2 RXD block check character BCC 10 29 conversion type 10 24 designating constant as end delimiter 10 27 designating constant as start delimiter 10 26 designating data register as S1 10 22 instruction 10 19 ladder diagram 10 19 operands 10 19 programming precautions 10 20 repeat cycles 10 25 51 Source 1 10 21 skip 10 28 5 Save As option 3 4 Save option 3 3 Scan Time G 29 scan time 9 50 Schematic G 29 SCR G 29 Select Rung option 4 3 Serial Operation G 29 SET 9 7 9 43 9 46 instruction 9 16 operands 9 16 Set SET 9 7 instruction 9 16 operands 9 16 Set Calendar and Time dialog box 8 10 Setpoint G 29 SFR 9 7 9 34 9 43 9 46 instruction 9 33 9 36 ladder diagram 9 35 SFRN 9 7 9 36 instruction 9 33 ladder diagram 9 37 SFTL instruction 9 112 ladder diagram 9 114 operands 9 117 SFTR instruction 9 112 ladder diagram 9 116 9 11
147. alue the ERRI indicator does not go on 2 When a program sum check error occurs operation is stopped momen tarily to recompile the user program After completing the recompilation operation resumes 3 Outputs where the error occurs are turned off Error Causes and Actions 1h Power Failure Power Off This error indicates when the power supply is lower than the specified voltage This error is also recorded when the power is turned off Clear the error code using FUN20 on the program loader 2h Watchdog Timer Error Watchdog Time The watchdog timer monitors the time required for one program cycle scan time When the time exceeds approximately 200 msec the watchdog timer indi cates an error If this error occurs frequently the Micro or Micro C should be replaced Clear the error code using FUN20 on the program loader 4h Data Link Connection Error PC Connect NG This error indicates that both data link slave stations function selector switch set to 1 6 and an expansion station function selector switch set to 7 are con nected to the data link master station function selector switch set to 0 Make sure that the function selector switches at all slave stations are set to 1 6 in the data link system The expansion link function cannot be used in the data link system 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES A2 8 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL To correct this error change the function select
148. ands of the ladder file in a Microsoft Notepad format with the option to print it File gt Listings Tag Selecting the Tag Name option from the File gt Listings menu will display all the tag names in the ladder file in a Microsoft Notepad file with an option to print it 3 FILE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 3 7 File gt Print Setup Selecting the Print Setup option from the File menu displays the options to select a printer the page orientation and the paper size Additionally you may change specific printer settings and the default printing device Depending upon the printer device you have installed the Print Setup dialog box will reflect the printer s configuration Follow the instructions enclosed with your printer for specific printing instructions File 2 Exit WindLDR Selecting the Exit WindLDR option from the File menu ends the WindLDR program You are given the choice to save any modified ladder files 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 3 FILE MENU 3 8 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 3 FILE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION The second menu option available is the Edit menu which allows users to e Undo the last command Cut copy or paste e Select rung select all e Find a tag name allocation number or tag name comment within the open ladder file e Insert append or delete e Edita coil rung comment or tag name The following options may be selected i Te
149. associated comments in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 176 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate the high speed instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruc tion without utilizing the high speed instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button Multi stage high speed counter counts input pulses to input 10 and com pares the current value with multiple preset values When the current value reaches the first preset value the first comparison output is turned on When the second preset value is reached the first comparison output is turned off and the second comparison output is turned on and so on The high speed counter current value is reset to zero when the Micro or Micro C is powered up The high speed counter holds the current value while Micro or Micro C is stopped and restarts counting input pulses starting with the existing current value Include the hard reset or soft reset in the user program if necessary NOTE One instruction HSCO through HSC3 and A D can be used only once in a user program 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 177 Allocation Numbers The HSC1 instruction uses the following input and internal relay num
150. at 0 D10 D20 D30 D10 D21 030 D10 D22 D30 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 110 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When only D1 destination is designated with a repeat the same result is set to the three operands starting with D1 destination ANDW 651 52 DIR REP D10 D20 D30 3 13 51 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 D10 D20 D30 D10 D20 D31 D10 D20 D32 When S1 and 52 source are designated with repeats the final result is set to destination operand D1 ANDW SIR 52 D1 REP D10 D20 D30 3 14 S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 D10 020 D30 D11 D21 D30 D12 D22 D30 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 111 When S1 source and D1 destination are designated with repeats different results are set to the three operands starting with D1 ANDW SIR 52 DIR REP 5 D10 D20 D30 3 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 D10 2 D20 D30 D11 D20 D31 D12 D20 D32 When S2 source and D1 destination are designated with repeats different results are set to the three operands starting with D1 ANDW 651 S2R DIR REP D10 D20 D30 3 16 51 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 D10 020 D30 D10 D21 D31 D10 D22 D32 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 112 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When all operands are designated with
151. ata Terminal G 12 Data Type Selection dialog box 9 201 9 204 10 4 Debugging G 12 debugging commands 2 1 Decoder G 12 default directory 3 3 3 4 Delete 4 4 Column instruction 9 207 instruction 9 207 Rung instruction 9 207 DGRD instruction 9 142 ladder diagram 9 143 9 146 operands 9 144 Diagnostic Program G 12 Differential G 12 Digital Data G 12 Digital Read DGRD instruction 9 142 ladder diagram 9 143 9 146 operands 9 144 Digital to Analog Converter G 12 Direct Monitor dialog box 8 14 Direct Monitor dialog screen 1 3 Disable Rung instruction 9 208 Disabled G 12 Discrete G 13 Disk Drive G 13 DISP instruction 9 137 ladder diagram 9 138 9 141 operands 9 139 wiring diagram 9 141 Display DISP instruction 9 137 ladder diagram 9 138 9 141 operands 9 139 INDEX VI WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL wiring diagram 9 141 DIV instruction 9 92 ladder diagram 9 98 operands 9 94 Division DIV instruction 9 92 ladder diagram 9 98 operands 9 94 document conventions 1 4 Documentation G 13 Double Precision G 13 Double Word Comparison 2 9 86 instruction 9 78 ladder diagram 9 88 operands 9 87 repeat operation 9 88 Download dialog box 8 24 Download To 8 25 PLC Network Type 8 25 program option 8 24 Transfer Mode 8 25 drag and drop 1 2 Dual Pulse Counter CDP instruction 9 26 Dual Pulse Reversible Counter CNTO 9 27 9 28 ladder diagram 9 29 Dump G 13 Duplex G 13 Dynamic Display G 13 Edit G 14 INDEX 20
152. ation When an error occurs in any operation special internal relay M304 user program execution error and error indicator ERRI are turned on and maintained while operation is continued Right Mouse Advanced Instructions _ Boolean Computation Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Boolean Computation gt accesses a sub menu of instructions And Word ANDW OR Word ORW and Exclusive OR Word XORW Boolean computations use the AND OR and exclusive OR statements as car ried out by the ANDW ORW and XORW instructions respectively 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 104 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Boolean Computation gt And Word ANDW displays the And Word ANDW dialog box You may also click the toolbar button Ard ARAI 51 Ez al REF TE Ard wand mm Ci OR 3 Esidirec Wiel Repost LE 3 In the Type field click the circle of the appropriate selection Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper S1 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper S2 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat The data in S1 and S
153. ation G 2 Ambient Temperature G 2 Ampere amp G 2 Analog G 2 Analog Data G 3 Analog Input Module G 3 2000 Analog Output Module G 3 analog potentiometer settings Analog Read 0 ANRO 9 148 Analog Read 0 ANRO analog potentiometer settings 9 148 instruction 9 146 ladder diagram 9 147 9 149 operands 9 148 Analog To Digital Conversion A D instruction 9 163 ladder diagram 9 164 9 165 operands 9 164 Analog Digital A D Converter G 3 AND 9 5 G 3 And AND 9 5 And Load AND LOD 9 5 AND LOD 9 5 instruction 9 42 And Not ANDN 9 5 And Word ANDW instruction 9 103 ladder diagram 9 105 operands 9 107 repeat operation 9 108 ANDN 9 5 ANDW instruction 9 103 ladder diagram 9 105 operands 9 107 repeat operation 9 108 Annunciator G 4 ANRO analog potentiometer settings 9 148 instruction 9 146 ladder diagram 9 147 9 149 operands 9 148 INDEX Il WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL ANSI G 4 Apparent Power G 4 Append 4 4 Column instruction 9 207 instruction 9 207 Ladder Line instruction 9 207 Rung instruction 9 207 Arithmetic Capability G 4 Armature G 4 Array G 4 ASA G 4 ASCII G 5 Assembly Language G 5 Asynchronous Shift Register G 5 Asynchronous Transmission G 5 Automatic Reset G 5 Auxiliary Contacts G 5 Bandwidth G 5 base unit system code D90 6 30 basic instructions icons 2 8 sub menu 9 4 table 9 5 Batch Monitor dialog screen 1 3 Batch Monitor option 8 20 Baud G 6 Baud
154. ation can be specified from the first byte through fifteenth byte The BCC is calculated for the range starting from the designated position up to the byte immediately before the BCC of the transmit data Example Transmit data consists of 17 bytes plus two BCC digits 1 Calculation Start Position 1 Ist 2nd i 4th n 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th oe BCC calculation range 5 BCC digit 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 16 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 2 Calculation Start Position 2 Ist 2nd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation range 4 BCC two digits BCC Calculation Formula The BCC calculation formula can be selected from the exclusive OR XOR or addition ADD operation Example Conversion results of transmit data consist of 41h 42h 43h 44h and 45h 1 BCC Calculation Formula XOR 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 41h 2 BCC Calculation Formula ADD 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 14Fh to 4Fh Only last one or two digits are used as BCC Conversion Type The result of a BCC calculation can be converted or not converted according to the designated conversion type as described below Example BCC calculation result is 0041h 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 17 1 Binary gt ASCII conversion 4 1 Binary gt ASCII conversion 34h 31h Nu two digits 2
155. ation number Refer to the Allocation Table in Appendix I for more information Error 001 Operand for has an invalid allocation number type The allocation number must be valid for the selected PLC and instruction Refer to the Allocation Table in Appendix 1 for more information Error 003 Preset value is not assigned This instruction requires a preset value that has been left blank Some valid preset values are TIM preset values 0 9999 CNT CDP and CUD preset values 0 9999 and CC gt preset values 0 9999 SFR and SFRN preset values 1 128 Error 005 Operand for cannot be a read only special internal relay This instruction cannot be assigned an operand of this type Refer to the Allocation Table in Appendix I for more information APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A2 21 Error 050 Allocation number is not an Up Counter number The allocation number is not valid for this instruction Refer to the Counters reference in the on line help Refer to the Allocation Table in Appendix I for more information Error 051 Allocation number is not a Dual Pulse Counter number The allocation number is not valid for this instruction Refer to the Counters reference in the on line help Refer to the Allocation Table in Appendix I for more information Error 052 Allocation number is not an Up Down Counter number The allo
156. atus Indicator Advanced Stop OFF ON Writing instruction user syntax error program Calendar clock Maintained Maintained ERRI ON Any time error Data link Stop OFF ERRI Initializing connection error data link Keep data sum Maintained Maintained OFF Turning check error power on 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES A2 5 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Link communi Maintained Maintained OFF Any time cation error Power failures Stop OFF ON 1 Any time Protect output Maintained Maintained ERRI ON During overload error 3 operation Sensor power Stop OFF ERRI and Any time overload error ERR2 ON TIM CNT preset Maintained Maintained OFF Starting value CRC error operation User program Stop OFF ERR1 ON Starting CRC error operation User program Maintained Maintained ERR1 During execution error operation User program Stop 2 OFF During sum check error operation User program Stop OFF Write user syntax error program User program Stop OFF Write user writing error program Watchdog timer Stop OFF ERR1 Any time error APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A2 7 NOTE 1 When the power voltage to the Micro or drops below the rated value the ERRI indicator is lit While the power voltage remains below the rated v
157. ay M303 Zeros set to the least significant bit LSB When bit to shift 1 Before shift MSB LSB El 1 0 0 1 1 o1 0 10 0 M303 Shift to the left After shift MSB LSB il 040 1 1 10 1 0 1 1111010 M303 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 115 Example SFTL MOV 51 D1 REP 43690 D10 SFTL D10 Bits to shift 1 Before shift D10 43690 CY MSB S1 LSB 1101110 11101110 11101110 11101110 0 M303 After fitst shift D10 21844 CY MSB LSB Hl 0111011 10111011 0111010 0 303 After s cond shift D10 43688 CY MSB 1 011 0111101110 THIS TDI M303 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 116 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Shift Right SFTR SFTR S1 gt When an input is on the 16 bit data of the data register designated by source operand S1 is shifted to the right by the quantity of bits designated by operand bit The result is set to the data register The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M303 Zeros are set to the most significant bit MSB When bit to shift 1 Before shift MSB LSB 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 E Shift to the right M303 After shift MSB S1 LSB CY Term 9 M303 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL
158. ays below the S1 field When set up descriptions of the source operands display in the S1 field Clicking on any of these options dis plays the corresponding transmit or receive information Transmit data designated by operand 51 can be a maximum of 200 bytes To add a new source operand click the Insert button Refer to page 10 4 for complete instructions D1 Originally when no options are entered only the blank tag name field displays below the D1 field When transmission is complete an output or internal relay designated by operand D1 is turned on 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 3 Once information is entered in the tag name field the allocation num ber field and the tag name comment fields display below the D1 option The middle field displays the allocation number of D1 Optionally enter a tag name description in the lower field D2 Originally when no options are entered only the blank tag name field displays below the D2 field Once information is entered in the tag name field the allocation num ber field and the tag name comment field display below the D2 option The middle field displays the allocation number of D2 Optionally enter a tag name description in the lower field Destination 2 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the operand designated by D2 The transmit status data register designated by D2 stores the status of the transmissio
159. bers Pulse input Input 10 Hard reset input Input Soft reset special internal relay Internal relay M315 when M315 is on the current value is reset to zero Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand Function D S1 Source 1 Multi stage preset data 0 99 for Micro 0 498 for Micro C Hard Reset Selection Input I1 can be used to reset the current value of high speed counter 5 LOW Resets the current value when input I1 is turned off HSC1 is enabled while I1 is on HIGH Resets the current value when input is turned on HSC1 is enabled while I1 is off Disables the hard reset Input can be used as an ordinary input 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 178 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Soft Reset Special Internal Relay M315 M301 is the initialize pulse special internal relay In addition to the hard reset using input I1 the current value of the high speed counter can be reset by turning special internal relay M315 on using another input output or internal relay M315 if used must be programmed immedi ately after the HSC instruction as shown in the previous example When data register D10 is designated as source operand S1 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 gt Quantity of preset stages gt lst stage preset upper digits 2 100 000 gt st stage preset lower di
160. bers and tag name comments You may also click the toolbar button aJ FE D Cds Lb Le ro mo 45 xj ig C Dt ee sr 5s Ea gt s rea 1 won M Tode e EE Li HET T gt Find Enter the text for which you wish to search Or click the Forward or Backward buttons to the right of the Find field and select from the list of previous searches 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 4 EDIT MENU 4 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Things to Search Select one two or all of the search options Tag Name Allocation Number and Tag Name Comment Examples of tag names are I1 Q4 T3 D30 and so forth For a complete listing of available allocation numbers refer to Appendix 1 Allocation Number Table Tag name comments are user supplied comment strings for coils Once the appropriate text string and search option s have been selected click either the Forward or Backward button The For ward button will find the previous occurrence of the text string The Backward button will find the next occurrence of the text string To back out of this option click the Cancel button To access on line help press the Help button Edit Insert Append Delete Selecting Insert allows you to insert a ladder line column or rung at any point in the program and in any location Selecting the Append
161. cal line upward move the cursor one position up CONTROL Erase the vertical line ending at the current position move the cursor one position up Backspace Move cursor one space left and delete Del Delete the item at the cursor End Go to the end of the current line End Go to the end of the ladder Control Home Go to the beginning of the current line Home Go to the beginning of the ladder Control Page Down Scroll down one page Page Up Scroll up one page 2 WINDLDR LEGENDS 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 2 3 Icons The Menu Commands toolbar is displayed in a banner at the top of your PC screen with the following main options available File Edit View Configure Compile Online Window Help Each of these options when selected displays a drop down sub menu of alterna tives for selection ores rra Ld Lame MOM 4 el MAS das SIM a tal wa i07 b 155 CEIZETIEEBSbE dz pom A drop down menu of options displ ys from each menu item E Rs prom Additionally rows of icons display from the ladder editing screen When no files are open only the top row of icons displays When a file is open multiple rows of menu bar icons depending on the PLC type are displayed 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 2 WINDLDR LEGENDS 2 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL C
162. cate a repeat 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 93 Enter the tag name or nickname the upper S2 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat The data in S1 and S2 is added subtracted multiplied or divided as specified in the Type field Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper D1 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat The result of the arithmetic is set to operand DI Optionally enter any associated comment in the lower tag name comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines If Repeat is selected enter the number of repeats in the REP field Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the arithmetic instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the arithmetic instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure 3 PLC Selection option 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 94 WINDLDR REFERENCE
163. cation number is not valid for this instruction Refer to the Counters reference in the on line help Refer to the Allocation Table in Appendix I for more information Error 100 Constant out of range Enter a constant between and See the instruction s reference page for more information Error 101 Preset value is out of range Enter a value between and Enter a valid preset value Some valid preset values are TIM preset values 0 9999 CNT CDP and CUD preset values 0 9999 and gt preset values 0 9999 SFR and SFRN preset values 1 128 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2 22 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Error 150 Repeats are used but repeat field is empty See the instruction s reference page for more information This error code applies only to advanced instructions Error 200 Allocation number is not assigned Error 201 Integer operand is not all integers Enter only numeric digits no alpha characters Error 202 Integer operand is out of DWORD range See the instruction s reference page for more information Error 203 Symbolic structure is not correct This error occurs when in an assigned field two or more let ters are used with numbers in a field See the instruction s reference page for more information Error 204 Unknown allocation number type character Refer to the Allocation Table in Ap
164. ce 2001 1 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 34 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 2 Zero Suppression The elimination of non significant zeros in a num ber Zener Diode A solid state voltage regulator for semiconductor devices GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX A A D instruction 9 163 ladder diagram 9 164 9 165 operands 9 164 AC Coupled Amplifier G 1 AC Input Module G 1 AC Output Module G 1 Access Time G 1 Accumulator G 1 ADD instruction 9 92 ladder diagram 9 94 9 96 operands 9 94 repeat operation 9 99 Adding Up Counters CNT2 CNT31 9 27 9 31 ladder diagram 9 32 Addition ADD instruction 9 92 ladder diagram 9 94 9 96 operands 9 94 repeat operation 9 99 repeat operation ladder diagram 9 96 Address G 2 instruction 9 122 ladder diagram 9 131 time scheduled control 9 132 Adjust ADJ instruction 9 122 ladder diagram 9 131 time scheduled control 9 132 advanced instructions 9 50 icons 2 7 input conditions 9 54 source and destination operands 9 55 structure 9 54 using timer or counter as destination operand 9 56 using timer or counter as source operand 9 55 Algorithm G 2 Allocation Number search 4 4 allocation numbers Gate Control HSC3 9 193 Multi stage Comparison HSC1 9 177 Multi stage Comparison HSC1 numeric and symbolic 9 180 Pulse Output Control HSC2 9 187 Single stage Comparison HSCO 9 170 Alphanumeric G 2 Alternating Current AC G 2 Ambient Compens
165. citly located at some predetermined position Floating Point A form of number representation where decimal points are not fixed by the length of the number itself but are implicit Flow Chart A graphic diagram used to represent the function of a system or sequence of operations using sym bols to represent the logical data flow Full Duplex Simultaneous two way data transmission through a communications channel G Graphics Methods and techniques for converting data to and from a graphic display Grey Code A binary code in which sequential numbers are represented by binary expressions each of which differs from the preceding expression in one place only Half Duplex Two way but not simultaneous transmission of data through a communications channel GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 17 Hard Copy A permanent printed document such as a ladder diagram program listing Hardware The mechanical electrical and electronic device s which compose a programmable logic controller system and it s application Head A device usually a small electromagnet on a stor age medium such as magnetic tapes that reads records or erases information on to that medium Hexadecimal A number system of the base 16 comprised of the digits 0 3 4 6 7 8 BEC D SESS and F 1 0 Abbr In
166. cked then the Constant Character dialog box will display pi n2 nonas nn Ciuma gt Canl 3 Hilp gt 2 Help If the Constant Character option was selected originally from the Data Type Selection dialog box then the Character field will display If the Constant Hex decimal option was selected originally from the Data Type Selection dialog box then the Hex decimal field will display 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 204 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL the S1 field of the Macro dialog box In the Hex decimal field enter the hex decimal data which will display in the S1 field of the Macro dialog box 3 In the Character field enter the character data which will display in Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to save the data type To back out of this dialog box without selecting a data type click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button If no option was selected within the S1 field when the Edit button is clicked then the Data Type Selection dialog box will display Maria Dnt CETT STE HIE Isp TE i nnar baraci Y3 Constan Hox 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 205 either Constant Character or Constant Hex decimal 5 In the Type field click the circle to the left of the desired option Once the dialog box is complete click the OK but
167. continues the Micro should be replaced APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A2 11 Advanced Instruction Syntax Error ADV Error NOTE This option is applicable for the Micro only When a user program syntax error error code 80h is indicated with type code 5 6 or 7 to signal an error related with advanced instruction the detailed informa tion can be viewed from the error code indicated by the ADV error line Error Code Error Details 1 The internal allocation number of the operand is invalid 2 Input or special internal relay is designated as destination 3 Quantity of repeat cycles is set to 32 or shift bits to 16 for shift rotate instructions or more 4 Advanced instruction which is not allowed for repeat usage is programmed more than once Correct the error in the user program and transfer the corrected user program to Micro The error code is cleared when a correct user program is transferred Link Communication Error COM Error This error indicates a communication error in the expansion link or data link system When this error occurs special internal relay M305 link communica tion error is also turned on The detailed information of this error can be viewed from the error code indicated in the COM error line This error code is stored in control data register D94 if it is enabled using FUN10 When this error occurs program opera
168. creen will display Micro amp 1 I erts ee EL Ee hE Ee 2 Ec E a Dower ei aun Sew Dower rae Sew Dake La mir Dake ba INL SCTETIEEITI ae Tag ee Poorer Pir aram PE MicroSmart ONC I pens aee inae pe ET mna Ee ET 1 Ee mr ai un E ces M 2 1 1 Dr D umi mien aun Sew dama D wm mtem Sew dama D raria pr Dake ba Micro 1 amp FA1 Series 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 25 Click on the desired options Then press the OK button As the transfer occurs it will display the current transfer status To back out of this option click the Cancel button To access on line help press the Help button Download To Click the diamond to the left of the desired option Select to download the file to either a PLC or a loader PLC Network Micro 1 FA1J FA2J and FASS series Click the diamond to the left of the desired option Select 1 1 if only one device is connected to your PC Select 1 N if more than one device is connected to your PC Transfer Mode Click the diamond to the left of the desired option Note whether the transfer mode is binary or ASCII 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU
169. current value is equal to or greater than the preset value designated by source operand S1 the output or internal relay designated by destination operand D1 is turned on and the pulse output at output QO is stopped HSC2 51 The current value of the high speed counter is reset to zero when the Micro or Micro C is powered up The high speed counter holds the current value while the Micro or Micro C is stopped It then restarts counting input pulses starting with the existing current value Include the hard reset or soft reset in the user program if necessary NOTE One instruction HSCO through HSC3 and A D can be used only once in a user program 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 187 Allocation Numbers The HSC2 instruction uses the following input and internal relay numbers Pulse input Input 10 Hard reset input Input Soft reset special internal relay Internal relay M315 when M315 is on the current value is reset to zero Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1 Source 1 D1 Destination 1 Function Preset value High speed counter output E Q m 0 31 M 0 287 T c R D Micro 0 99 D 0 498 Micro3C Constant 1 4 294 967 295 Repeat M 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 188 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANU
170. d into the first bit in a forward shift regis ter or into the last bit in a reverse shift register SFR instruction 5 Two required addresses Forward Shift Register SFR First Bit 0 63 standard processing mode 0 31 high speed processing mode Number of Bits 1 64 standard processing mode 1 32 high speed processing mode 12 NOTE When power is turned off the statuses of all shift register bits are normally cleared It is also possible to maintain the statuses of the shift register bits by set ting FUN4 as required SET RO Example 10 SFR Set and Reset RST I R3 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 36 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL e Any shift register bit can be turned on using the SET instruction e Any shift register bit can be turned off using the RST instruction e SET and RST instruction is actuated by any input condition e The last bit status output can be programmed directly after entering the SFR instruction with two required addresses In this example the status of bit R3 is read to output Q3 e bit can be loaded using the LOD R instructions Reverse Shift Register SFRN For reverse shifting use the SFR instruction followed by the NOT instruction When SFRN instructions are programmed two addresses are always required Enter the SFR and NOT instructions followed by a shift register number selected from the appropriate operand numbers The shift register nu
171. designated by source operands 51 and S141 is compared with the 32 bit data designated by source operands 2 and 52 1 When S1 S1 1 data is equal to S2 S241 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1 S2 D1 Source 1 Source 2 Destination 1 Function Data to compare Data to compare Comparison output 0 31 0 287 T R D Micro 0 99 0 99 D 0 498 0 498 Micro C Constant Repeat 1 31 1 31 1 31 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 88 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL NOTE In the high speed processing mode operands for advanced instructions are limited Examples CMP2 The comparison output is usually maintained while the input to the comparison instruction is off If the comparison output is on the on status is maintained when the input is turned off as demonstrated by this program This program turns the output off when the input is off D10 Repeat Operation the Double Word Comparison Instruction Unlike other advanced instructions when S1 and or S2 source is designated with a repeat and when D1 destination is not designated with a repeat then the comparison results are ANDed and set to one destination D1 REP 00
172. dialog box You may also click the toolbar button 152 Di Mame mm Alhan mm Bam High or Disable This selection is used to reset the current value of 5 In the HSC2 field click the circle of the appropriate selection Low the high speed counter 2 Enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name fields Then enter the associated operands in the Allocation Number fields below The S1 fields indicate the preset value The D1 fields indicate the high speed counter output Finally optionally enter any associated comments in the Tag Name Comment fields This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate the high speed instruction on your ladder 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 186 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL To back out of this instruction without utilizing the high speed instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button The HSC2 instruction is used with the pulse output PULS instruction to gen erate a predetermined number of pulse outputs The PULS instruction generates high frequency output pulses at output QO By hard wiring output QO to input I0 HSC2 counts input pulses to input IO Input pulses can also be entered to input 10 from another source When the HSC2
173. ds If sec onds are between 0 and 29 for the current time the adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes remain the same If seconds are between 30 and 59 for the current time the adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes are incremented by one The ADJ instruction is useful for precise timing which starts at zero seconds 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 132 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Since the ADJ instruction is executed at the rising edge of the input a pulse input from an SOTU or SOTD instruction is not required 195 When input 14 is turned the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds ADJ Example Time Scheduled Control This example demonstrates a program to turn output QO on and off according to the chart below e ON amp OFF 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 April 3 June 1 August 20 8 30 16 55 12 05 Comparison Comparison Comparison Data 1 Data 3 Data 5 May 2 July 2 September 26 8 30 19 50 17 20 Comparison Comparison Comparison Data 2 Data 4 Data 6 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 133 Internal relays are allocated as shown below Compari Month Day Day of Hour Minute son Data Week 1 M10 Mil M12 M13 M14 2 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 3 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 4 M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 5 M50 M51 M52 M53 M54 6 M60 M61 M62 M63 M64 Calendar Clock Readout Data Year D2
174. e having an entire library of PLC manuals at your fingertips complete with easy access and context sensitive help about everything from WindLDR functions to PLC hardware To access On Line Help click the icon in the menu bar at any time Spe Tadek ca Ram If any information on the screen displayed is of ae special interest then an oc arrow and a balloon such asas as these will direct your peres attention to that point 4141 pore 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 6 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL CLIP and CUBIO Shortcuts Many shortcut elements from CLIP and CUBIQ are present in WindLDR So if you are familiar with these shortcut keys they are also available with this pro gram For example e Typing characters while in the editing mode will automatically bring up the Coil Selection Dialog screen with the first letter of the command abbrevia tion highlighted e You can easily draw ladder lines WindLDR by holding the SHIFT key and using the arrow keys to draw Ladder lines can just as easily be erased by holding down the CONTROL key and using the arrow keys to erase WARNING Unlike CLIP and CUBIQ WindLDR uses rungs blocks of logic in building ladder programs Users must exercise caution and keep the size of the rung to a minimum Large and tedious rungs produce unpredicted errors and prob lems in Wind
175. e high speed counter restarts counting M316 High Speed When the current value of high speed Counter counter HSC3 exceeds the maximum value HSC3 of 65535 M316 is turned on M316 is Overflow turned off when the high speed counter is reset using the hard or soft reset input Mote In Operation 317 remains on while Micro is running Output 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 1 12 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Micro C Allocation Numbers The Micro C PLC is programmed using operands such as inputs outputs inter nal relays timers counters shift registers and data registers Option Allocation Function Description Inputs Relays to receive input signals through the input terminals Outputs Q Relays to send the processed results of the user program to the output terminals Internal M Relays used in Micro C cannot be output to Relays the output terminals P Special Inter M Internal relays dedicated to specific functions nal Relays Timers T Relays used in the user program available in 100 msec 10 msec and 1 msec timers Counters Relays used the user program available reversible counters and adding counters Shift R Registers to shift the data bits according to Registers pulse inputs Data D Registers used to store numerical data some Registers are dedicated to special functions APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 2001
176. e selected aa View Tool Bar Checking and unchecking the Tool Bar option for the View menu toggles the main Tool Bar at the top of the display on and off 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 5 VIEW MENU 5 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL View Status Bar Checking and unchecking the Status Bar option from the View menu toggles the Status Bar at the base of the display on and off The status bar displays the program status PLC type communication settings and the current cursor position from left to right The program status field dis plays tips about the command to which your mouse cursor currently points Double clicking the PLC type field displays the PLC Selection dialog box Double clicking the communications settings field displays the Communica tions Settings dialog box View Messages Checking and unchecking the Tip Messages option from the View menu tog gles the balloon help messages for the icons on and off When the Show Tip Messages option is enabled pop up balloon help is avail able For example by positioning the cursor over of the New icon a pop up tip message displays the icon s function New 5 VIEW MENU 2001 1 6 CONFIGURE MENU The fourth menu option available is the Configure menu which allows you to adjust the configurations and settings of your PLC hardware while using WindLDR The following options may be selected
177. ec Timer TMS 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 25 Timer Circuit The preset value 0 9999 can be designated using data register 00 099 in the standard mode or D0 D31 in the high speed mode When a data register is used the information in the data register becomes the preset value Enter the TIM TMH or TMS instruction with the two required addresses Then enter the output OUT instruction 100 msec Timer TIM n Qo e Countdown from the preset value is initiated when the operation results directly before the timer input is on timer output turns on when the timed value reaches zero The timed value returns to the preset value when the timer input is off e The same timer or counter number cannot be programmed more than once In this event an error message will result Timer preset values be changed without transferring the entire program to the PLC base unit again If the timer preset value is changed during time down the timer remains unchanged for one cycle The change will be reflected in the next cycle If the timer preset value is changed to zero then the timer stops operation and the timer output is turned on immediately 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 26 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Basic Instructions Counter Selecting Basic Instructions gt Counter gt Up Cou
178. ecompile your ladder file The Direct Moni tor and Batch Monitor dialogs display the values of data in real time Coils can be edited simply by double clicking on them no need to create new coils from scratch Along with IDEC s quality PLCs you get the service and software sup port you expect WindLDR is compatible with Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4 0 So transferring files across different platforms is quick and easy WindLDR Package When purchasing WindLDR software packages the following items are included e WindLDR configuration software on CD ROM WindLDR Reference Manual WindLDR Tutorial e WindLDR software registration card e IDEC Corporation Software End User License Agreement 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Document Conventions Throughout this manual you will find icons and key combinations specific to the instructions These particular documentation conventions are explained as follows While all keyboards are set up uniquely the ENTER RETURN or NEXT key is always written as ENTER in this manual Additionally referencing a common button such as OK Cancel or Help is noted as the OK button In text when an icon is available for use it will be noted as click either the E or button Action items are denoted by the following arrow graphic 3 Alongside this symbol the corresponding action i
179. ection Micro and Micro C Function Area Settings Some instructions for the ONC are the same as those for the Micro and Micro C You can also find details on the Func tion Area Settings of the ONC in the ONC Hardware Manual The dialog boxes for the ONC Function Area Settings are shown below E pe T ne 52222212 ee Fey Me 7 1 Fey Me 5 1 T 5 Iren mi iee m lm Dm b Lm L Lm Eu ao e wd wa de 1 mp mj rm m 1a x Ta Module 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 33 ey Ce y fe fk ek ye m b Fey eT Ce r m B z ratem Y nE I zh D amid oe mar sud etas tmm 1a TA ae mj 1 4 rom ELI ae mj a4 ae mj a Filter Catch Data Link Communication Port eT ey ee ey Te ee ones aa k E L E to EPI Ba arn 1 T 1 1 P Li Sk oo LE 1 s s i oI B alae Ete ate nr m Tr was was zm Others NOTE For details on all the above selections
180. ee to all of the terms of this agreement you must erase all installed IDEC Corporation software files from your system User Comments IDEC Corporation is eager to receive comments about its products and docu mentation Please phone fax mail or e mail any comments to IDEC Corporation Marketing Technical Documentation 1175 Elko Drive Sunnyvale CA 94089 2209 PH 800 262 4332 FAX 800 635 6246 www idec com E mail support idec com 2000 IDEC CORPORATION TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introductions ot tte eat deo e iR ced 1 1 WindLDR Version 4 0 Features 1 2 WindLDR Package 1 3 Document Conventions 1 4 On Line Help 1 5 CLIP and CUBIQ Shortcuts 1 6 Technical Support 1 6 Installing WindLDR Software 1 7 Hardware Software Recommendations 1 8 Chapter 2 W ndLDR Lepends i1 tuo Pa 2 1 Quick Editing Keys 2 1 Icons 2 3 Menu Commands Toolbar Icons 2 5 Advanced Instruction Icons 2 7 Basic Instruction Icons 2 8 Chapter 3 FilesMen i 33 s Sse cn de dest he 3 1 File New 3 2 File Open 3 2 2001 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL File Save 3 3 Save As 3 4 File Listings Ladder 3 5 File Listings Ladder Preview 3 5 File Listings Cover Page 3 6 File Listings Function Area Settings 3 6 File Listings Program Compare 3 6 File Listings Cross Reference 3 6 File Listings Tag Name 3 6 File Print Setup 3 7 Exit WindLDR 3 7
181. enu options display the menu bar at the top of the screen The first option available is the File menu which allows users to e Select among existing ladder files e Create new ladder files Save or rename open ladder files e Print preview and print files e List and print function area settings program compare cross reference and tag names e Exit out of the WindLDR software program The following options may be selected Le er bE 88 ee deed ch Se Bh 3 2001 IDEC CORPORATION FILE MENU WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 3 2 File New Selecting the New option from the File menu opens a new empty WindLDR ladder file This newly created file is numbered to reflect its order of creation The new file format is determined by the default or current PLC settings A dia log box will not display with this option To name the ladder file select the Save or Save As option from the File menu You may also click the toolbar button ni NOTE You may open up to 11 ladder files at once File Open Selecting the Open option from the File menu opens an existing WindLDR lad der file complete with PLC settings and ladder preferences You may also click the toolbar button Vie LE D rkr Le ro 1 2 A20 Wigs TE BP le
182. epeat this procedure for each PLC connected to your PC 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 37 Configure Ladder preferences Selecting the Ladder preferences option from the Configure menu displays La iu a dcm Sicha kl Rode che Mc 2 sla nje H a lo fps Rung Display To specify the options which will display on the rungs of the ladder click the square next to each appropriate selection Show Rung Clicking this option displays a comment that is associated Comment with a rung and appears before the rung Every rung has a rung comment of at least one line but does not have a fixed length Show Rung Clicking this option displays the rung tag name and allo cation numbers To turn off the rung display leave the square unchecked This option is useful when you are only interested in mne monics 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 38 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Show Tag Clicking this option displays the tag name under each coil N bags DUNS Normally only the tag name is displayed Show Clicking this option displays the allocation number under Allocation each coil Show Clicking this option displays the ladder mnemonics under Mnemonics Tm each coil after compiling Fix Columns Clicking this option and setting the number of fix columns will set the rungs to the nu
183. erand numbers The same output can be set and reset many times within a program RST instructions operate in every scan while the input is on The following chart provides all RST operands 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 19 Instruction Standard High Speed l n NS Q 000 031 000 011 M 000 287 000 047 R 000 063 000 031 name or nickname in the Tag Name field 5 Accept the default Reset the Type field Then enter the tag Next enter the appropriate operand in the Allocation Number field Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the RST instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the RST instruc tion click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 20 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Basic Instructions Single Output Selecting Basic Instructions gt Single Output gt Single Output Up SOTU dis plays the SOTU icon within the selected area of the ladder The selected area appears as a shaded gray square To select the SOTU instruction you may also click the toolbar button Selecting
184. eset value can be designated with a constant or data register When a data register is used the information in the data register becomes the preset value Preset Input Up Down Selection Reversible Counter CNT1 The same counter or timer number cannot be programmed more than once e The up mode is selected when the up down selection input is on down mode is selected when the up down selection input is off e When the preset input is on the preset value is set 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 31 e The counter output is on only when the counted value is zero e After the counted value reaches zero counting down it changes to 9999 on the next count down e After the counted value reaches 9999 counting up it changes to zero on the next count up e The preset input must be turned on initially so that the counted value returns to the preset value e The preset input must be turned off before counting may begin When the preset value is changed during a counter operation the change becomes effective immediately Adding Up Counters CNT2 CNT31 Standard counter circuits using the CNT instruction feature an adding UP counter There 30 adding counters CNT2 CNT31 in the standard pro cessing mode or 14 adding counters in the high speed mode When counter instructions are programmed two addresses are required The cir cuit
185. esignated by operand bit The last bit status rotated out of the data register is set to a carry special internal relay M303 When bit to rotate 1 Before rotation MSB LSB 1 0 of 1 HISHI fo oT iT 170 Rotate to the right M303 After rotation MSB LSB L0 1 Of 0 0 M303 Example ROTR MOV 51 D1 REP 13 D20 es M301 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the Micro or Micro C starts operation the move MOV instruction sets 13 to data register D20 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 122 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Each time input is turned on 16 bit data of data register D20 is rotated to the right by one bit as designated by the operand bit The last bit status rotated out of the data register is set to a carry special internal relay M303 Bits to shift 1 Before rotation D10 40966 CY MSB D10 LSB 110 110 0 010 0 1010 0 01 011 110 M303 After fitst rotation D10 16397 CY MSB D10 LSB 0 1 010 0 010 0 1010 0 0111111011 M303 After s cond rotation D10 32794 MSB D10 LSB 0 1 0 0 ofto 0 0 ofto O O T 0 M303 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Real time Clock Calendar Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Real time Clock Calendar accesses a sub menu of instructions Calendar Read CALR Calendar Write CALW Clock Read CLKR Clock Write CLKW and Adjust AD
186. etween 0 and 4 the pulse width coefficient is designated as 5 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 159 When a data register is designated as 51 make sure that the value of the data reg ister does not exceed 249 If the value of the data register designated as 51 exceeds 249 during operation a user program execution error will occur Then the ERRI indicator on the Micro base unit is lit and special internal relay M304 turns on Correct the program and transfer the corrected program to the base unit When a data register is designated as 51 the data is read as the user program is scanned When changing the value of the data register designated as S1 change the value slowly in comparison to the output frequency When 0 is monitored while the PWM instruction is executed QO remains on and the output indicator also remains on When the input to the PWM instruc tion is turned off while the pulse output is on the output is turned off after a complete pulse is generated Output Pulse Width Ratio Select MODEI through MODE4 to determine the pulse cycle period MODE Pulse Cycle Period MODEI 51 2 msec MODE2 25 6 msec MODE3 3 2 msec MODF4 1 6 msec 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 160 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The output pulse width ratio is determined by the following equation The out put frequency is determined by the following
187. ff the counter starts counting the pulse inputs as they change from off to on 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 33 Right Basic Instructions Shift Register Selecting Basic Instructions Shift Register 9 Forward SFR displays the For ward Shift Register SFR dialog box Selecting Basic Instructions Shift Register 2 Reverse SFRN displays the Reverse Shift Register SFRN dialog box SFR You may also click the toolbar button x Frireore rd Shit Cm T Hylp field either Forward or Reverse 3 Click the circle to the left of the appropriate selection in the Type Then enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Next enter the appropriate operand in the Allocation Number field In the Preset Value field enter the number of bits to shift Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 34 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the shift register instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without setting up a shift register click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PL
188. for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate the analog instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the analog instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse but ton instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option ANRO When an input is the value 0 249 set with analog potentiometer 0 is read to the data register designated as the destination This instruction is useful for adjusting the preset values of timer TIM TMH and TMS and pulse PULS and PWM instructions 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 148 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL NOTE Analog potentiometer 0 is provided on all models of Micro and Micro C base units Analog potentiometer 1 is provided on 16 point type and 24 point type Micro base units only So ANRO can be used on all models but ANRI can be used on 16 point type and 24 point type Micro models only Valid Operands Standard Processing Function Destination to store the analog potentiometer value Operand D 0 99 for Micro 0 498 for Micro C In the high speed processing mode data registers for these instructions are lim ited to DO throug
189. g the Save As option from the File menu saves the active WindLDR lad der file under a new file name complete with PLC settings and ladder prefer ences ik bP Jodi Lb Lam ro dx ye HERE cpm n fe p ad adr STE Eu OAN wu pts Bit Pave as E aae E EI Stan XL Rv Roe 1l al 2 M uc nnm ye i EU Within the Save As dialog box enter a file name into the File Name field The default file name reflects its order of creation Save File as Type All ladder files must have the file extension Ladder Diagram ldr Directories Unless otherwise specified the default directory for all ladder files is C windldr If you wish to access another directory use the scroll bars and your mouse button to highlight the appropriate directory 3 FILE MENU 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 3 5 Drives Use the arrow icon and your mouse button to select among available drives within this field In general the drive is your hard drive and the a drive is your floppy drive Once the appropriate file name drive and directory have been entered click the OK button To back out of this option without saving or renaming the file click the Cancel button File gt Listings Ladder Selecting the Listings option from the File menu allows the user to view print the following features Ladde
190. ginal defaults If an invalid reset input number is entered an error message will display A valid input number must be entered or the invalid number will be erased NOTE Input numbers ending in 8 or 9 are not valid 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 11 Keep Functions Three optional status managing functions are available within this field Internal Relay Keep The status of internal relays are cleared in the event of a power failure It is possible however to designate some or all internal relays to retain their status when the program is restarted Use this field to designate certain internal relays to keep their status while others are cleared when there is a power failure The All Clear option also the default setting clears the status of all internal relays upon power up when there has been a power failure Click the circle to the left of the option to select it The All Keep option designates all the internal relays in use to keep their status when there is a power failure Thus upon power up the status of internal relays will remain the same Click the circle to the left of the option to select it 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 12 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The Keep to option retains the status of all internal relays upon power up prior to the relay entered in the accompanying field Click the circle to the left of the option to select it
191. gits gt Ist stage output 200 output QO gt 2nd stage preset upper digits 200 000 2nd stage preset lower digits 2nd stage output 201 output Q1 600 000 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 179 Multi Stage Data Setting The data of comparison stages preset values and comparison outputs are stored in consecutive data registers starting with the data register designated by source operand S1 Store the quantity of preset stages in the first data register In the next two data registers store the upper and lower digits of the preset value for the first stage In the fourth data register store the destination of the first stage comparison output using the numeric allocation number of the output or internal relay Store the data in these data registers before executing the HSC1 instruction Preset Value The preset value can be between 1 and 4 294 967 295 FFFF FFFFh which is stored in two consecutive data registers The first data register stores the upper digits and the next data register stores the lower digits If the preset value is changed during the high speed counter operation the high speed counter remains unchanged for that cycle The change will be reflected in the next count cycle after resetting 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 180 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Numeric and Symbolic A
192. h D31 Since the ANRO and ANRI instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from an SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Analog Potentiometer Settings The analog potentiometer values and set positions are shown below Turned to the Left Extremity Turned to the Right Extremity o 9 0 Se oq O O O O O O O O Maximum Value 0 Maximum Value 249 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 149 Example ANRO ANRO D80 10 When input 10 is on the value from analog potentiometer 0 is read to data regis ter D80 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Pulse and A D Conversion Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Pulse and A D Conversion gt accesses a sub menu of instructions Pulse Output PULS Pulse Width Modulation PWM and Analog To Digital Conversion A D NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure 3 PLC Selection option 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 150 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL gt Pulse Output PULS Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Pulse and A D Conversion gt Pulse Output PULS displays the Pulse Output PULS dialog box PULS You may also click the toolbar button 22 Trav
193. he high speed instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruc tion without utilizing the high speed instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button High speed counter 0 counts input pulses to input 10 When the current value is HSCO S1 equal to or greater than the preset value designated by source operand 51 the output or internal relay designated by destination operand D1 is turned on The current value of the high speed counter is reset to zero when the Micro or Micro C is powered up The high speed counter holds the current value while the Micro or Micro C is stopped and restarts counting input pulses starting with the existing current value Include the hard reset or soft reset in the user program if necessary NOTE Only one HSCO HSC3 and A D instruction be used in each user program 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 170 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Allocation Numbers The HSCO instruction uses the following input and internal relay numbers Pulse input Input IO Hard reset input Input I1 Soft reset special internal relay Internal relay M315 when M315 is on the current value is reset to zero Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1 Source 1 D1 Destination 1 Function Preset value High speed counter output 0 31 M 0 287 T C
194. he Configure gt PLC Selection option 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 5 a Cum Dux zc ia k TEGE Hom omal 217 disait die daa E te EFI LEER Feal dings Opa F dame Thu D eB ox are L F loarn Ferrarat E Symbol Name Function Address AND And Series connection of normally open 1 NO contact AND LOD And Load Series connection of circuit blocks 1 ANDN And Not Series connection of normally 1 closed NC contact BPP Bit Pop Restores the result of bit logical oper 1 ation which was saved temporarily BPS Bit Push Saves the result of bit logical 1 operation temporarily BRD Bit Read Reads the result of bit logical oper 1 ation which was saved temporarily 2001 1 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 6 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Counter Equal to comparison of counter 2 Compari current value son gt Counter Greater than or equal to compari 2 Compari son of counter current value son gt CNT Counter Adding or reversible counter 2 0 9999 END End Ends a program 1 JEND Jump End Ends a jump instruction 1 JMP Jump Jumps a designated program area 1 LOD Load Stores intermediate results and 1 reads contact status LODN Load Not Sto
195. he Micro or starts operation the MOV instructions set calendar data to data registers D40 through D43 D40 94 Year 1994 D41 4 April D42 20 Day D43 3 Wednesday 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 128 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When input is turned on the calendar is set using data from data registers D40 through D43 NOTE Calendar data can also be set using FUN28 Clock Read CLKR H E When an input is on clock data hour minute and second is read to three data registers starting with the designated operand D Hour 0 to 23 0 1 0 59 D 2 Second 0 to 59 Operands Possible Function Destination to read the clock data Operand D o 99 for Micro 0 498 for Micro C 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 129 Example CLKR ES D50 I2 2 When input I2 is on clock data is read to data registers D50 through D52 D50 Hour 0 to 23 D51 Minute 0 to 59 D52 Second 0 to 59 Clock Write CLKW 8 When an input is turned on the clock is set using the data stored three data registers starting with the designated operand D Hour 0 to 23 1 Minute 0 to 59 D 2 Second 0 to 59 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 130 WI
196. he input condition is on the advanced instruction is executed in each scan To execute the advanced instruction only at the rising or falling edge of the input use the SOTU or SOTD instruction 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION MOV 51 D1 REP D10 D20 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 55 Source and Destination Operands The source and destination operands specify 16 bit word data When a bit oper and such as input output internal relay or shift register is designated as a source or destination operand 16 points starting with the designated number are pro cessed as source or destination data When a word operand such as timer or counter is designated as a source operand the current value is read as source data When a timer or counter is designated as a destination operand the result of the advanced instruction is set to the preset value for the timer or counter When a data register is designated as a source or destina tion operand the data is read from or written to the designated data register Using a Timer or Counter as a Source Operand Since all timer instructions TIM 100 msec timer TMH 10 msec timer and TMS 1 msec timer subtract from the preset value the current value is decre mented from the preset value and indicates the remaining time As described above when a timer is designated as a source operand of an advanced instruc tion the current value or the remaining time of the
197. his field sets the hardware properties number of inputs and outputs for the expansion PLC Refer to your PLC s hardware manual for complete expansion information Upon accessing the Micro 1 Configuration dialog box the Serial I O Module 8 in 8 out option defaults Accepting this selection provides the maximum number of available I O However the appropriate expansion unit should be selected NOTE Unlike CLIP WindLDR checks the I O for the specific PLC hardware configu ration 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Micro Configuration and Micro C Configuration If the Micro is highlighted when the Configure button is pressed the following dialog box displays x J JI r LL ind 1 I CETE a 3H nn zx une oca If the Micro C is highlighted when the Configure button is pressed the follow ing dialog box displays 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 5 Base Unit CPU Click the diamond next to the appropriate master PLC hardware properties The number of inputs is followed by the slash sign and then by the number of out puts Expansion Unit Click the diamond next to the appropriate extension This field sets the hardware properties nu
198. ht mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure 3 PLC Selection option Three types of counters are available dual pulse reversible counter up down selection reversible counter CNT1 and adding up counters CNT2 CNT31 A total of 32 timers and counters can be programmed in the standard processing mode Each counter must be allocated to a unique number 0 31 The same number cannot be used for timers In the high speed processing mode counter numbers 0 15 are available The following table provides information about each available counters 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 28 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Counter Allocation Number Preset Value Dual Pulse CNTO Reversible Counter 0 to 9999 Up Down Selection CNTI Data registers DO to D99 standard mode Reversible Counter Adding Up Counter CNT2 CNT31I standard mode Data registers DO to D31 high speed CNT2 CNTI15 mode high speed mode Dual Pulse Reversible Counter CNTO These counters have up and down pulse inputs so that three inputs are required The circuit for a dual pulse counter must be programmed in the following order 10 Preset input 11 Up pulse input 12 Down pulse input 13 CNTO instruction 14 Counter preset value from 0 to 9999 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 29 The preset value can be des
199. ialog box without selecting an error to pinpoint click the Cancel button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 7 COMPILE MENU 7 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL NOTE You also may edit the ladder without closing the Error Message Dialog screen However adding or deleting rungs this way will alter the locations of the fol lowing error messages 7 COMPILE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION The sixth menu option available is the Online menu This option allows you to monitor the status of your PLC conveniently from your PC to upload and download your ladder programs to and from your PLC to check for any com munication errors which may have occurred during the connection and to set up the link map in the PLC network The following options may be selected eh Mr ai kire ie le LIT TEE i YE bh Bb ne EIJ SALH 1 2 26 bil uiii tai bs Ea n aeee Tz ma Thee MUNIRI a a rarus Tg irr rm FH 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The options below are available from the Monitor option of the Online menu e Monitor Ladder Monitor Link e Communications Errors PIC Status e Direct Monitor e Point Write e Direct Set Reset e Batch Monitor Online Monitor Selecting the Monitor option from the Online menu allows you to monitor the activity of the cu
200. iate selection Once a type is selected only the corresponding tag names will display All Allows you to see all the operand types Allows you to see only the inputs used in the program Q Allows you to see only the outputs used in the program M Allows you to see only the internal relays used in the program DR Allows you to see only the data registers used in the program L Allows you to see all the link registers used in the program TIM Allows you to see only the timers used in the program CNT Allows you to see only the counters used in the program T C Allows you to see both timers and counters used in the program SFR Allows you to see only the shift registers used in the program Displays all valid operand types 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 4 EDIT MENU 4 10 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Show Operands To display the operands based on type click the diamond next to the appropriate selection Once a type is selected only the operand types will display All Allows you to see all operands based upon the operand type Invalid Allows you to see all invalid operands Used Allows you to see all operands which are in use Unused Allows you to see all operands which are not in use 4 EDIT MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION The third menu option available is the View menu which allows users to adjust the views available while using WindLDR The following options may b
201. ight mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse but ton instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option DGRD I Conversion BCD or BIN Quantity of Digits 1st Input 1st Output 1 5 0 32 0 31 When input is on the data designated by I and Q is set to 16 internal relays or data registers designated by destination operand D1 This instruction can be used to set preset values for timer TIM TMH and TMS counter CNT and counter comparison instructions using digital switches NOTE The DGRD instruction can be used on transistor output type Micro base units only The DGRD instruction can be used only once in a user program NOTE Do not use the DGRD instruction between JMP and JEND instructions or between MCS and MCR instructions 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 144 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Valid Operands Standard Processing Operand D1 Destination 1 Function First input First output Destination to number read number for store results digital selection 0 35 E Lm Q 0 31 M 0 287 T z R D Micro 0 99 D mE 0 498 Micro C Constant Repeat NOTE the high speed processing mode operands for advanced
202. ignated with a constant or data register When a data register is used the information in the data register becomes the preset value Preset Input Dual Pulse Reversible Counter CNTO Il Down Pulse 12 The same counter or timer number cannot be programmed more than once e When the up pulse and down pulse on simultaneously no pulse is counted When the preset input is on the preset value is set e When the preset input is off counting starts The counter output is on only when the counted value is zero e the counted value reaches zero counting down it changes to 9999 on the next count down e After the counted value reaches 9999 counting up it changes to zero on the next count up e The preset input must be turned on initially so that the counted value returns to the preset value e The preset input must be turned off before counting may begin When the preset value is changed during a counter operation the change becomes effective immediately 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 30 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Up Down Selection Reversible Counter CNT1 These counters have selection inputs to switch the up down gate so that three inputs are required The circuit for a selection counter must be programmed in the following order Preset input Up down pulse input Selection input CNT1 instruction NA o Counter preset value from 0 to 9999 The pr
203. inary conversion 1 31h 32h ASCII binary conversion 2 ASCII gt BCD gt binary conversion BCD conversion conversion 1 ASCII gt binary conversion c 1 EA 31h 32h No conversion 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 25 Repeat Cycles When a data register is designated with a repeat the received data is divided and converted in the same way as specified The converted data is stored in as many consecutive data registers as repeat cycles Example Received data of 6 bytes is divided into two digit blocks converted in ASCII 2 binary and stored to data registers starting at D20 1 9 2 A 31h 32h 33h 34h 1 Repeat Cycles 2 2 digits 2 digits 1st block 2nd block ASCII 2 binary conversion Repeat 1 Repeat 2 P P 3 4 6 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h ORIS 2 digits 2 digits 2 digits Ist block 2nd block 3rd block ASCII binary conversion Repeat 1 Repeat 2 Repeat 3 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 26 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Designating a Constant as a Start Delimiter A start delimiter can be programmed at the first byte in the receive format of an RXD instruction This way the can recognize the beginning of valid communication although an RXD instruction without a start delimiter can also be exec
204. ings Pressing the Defaults button resets the format for the PLC selected in the Configure gt PLC selection option Once the appropriate communication settings have been selected click the OK button To back out of this option without changing any preferences click the Cancel button To access on line help press the Help button NOTE Check your PLC s hardware manual to determine the appropriate communica tion mode settings to use Your PC may also have different port configurations 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 36 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Communication Port Settings Use this option to set up the basic communication options Default Selected Options Baud Rate 9600 bps 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Data Length 8 Micro 1 FA Series 7 8 7 ONG Micro Micro C MicroSmart Parity EVEN EVEN ODD NONE Stop Bits 1 1 2 Port COMI COMI COM2 COM3 COM4 Use the up and down arrow scroll bars to select the appropriate settings PLC Network Settings If only one PLC is connected to your PC click the circle to the left of the 1 1 option If a PLC network is connected to your PC click the circle to the left of the 1 N option Then use the Device No field to allocate a device number to the current PLC selected the Configure PLC selection option For Micro 1 FA Series PLCs and MicroSmart enter 0 31 For Micro Micro C and ONC PLCs enter 0 255 R
205. input I1 is turned off HSC3 is enabled while I1 is on HIGH Resets the current value when input I1 is turned on HSC3 is enabled while I1 is off t Disables the hard reset Input I1 can be used as an ordinary input Gate Input Input I2 is allocated as a gate input for the HSC3 instruction When I2 is on HSC3 is enabled to count input pulses to input I0 When I2 is turned off HSC3 is disabled and the current value is moved to the data register designated by des tination operand D1 When 12 is turned on again HSC3 starts counting from the previous current value Soft Reset Special Internal Relay M315 In addition to the hard reset using input I1 the current value of the high speed counter can be reset by turning special internal relay M315 on using another input output or internal relay M315 if used must be programmed immedi ately after the HSC instruction as shown above 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 195 Input Filter and Input Frequency The Micro and Micro C have hard and soft filter functions Only the hard filter works on high speed counter instructions The hard filter settings affect the input response The maximum input frequency for the HSC3 instruction is 10 kHz Block Diagram HSC3 Gate Control HSC3 counts input pulses to input 10 while gate input 12 is on and stops count ing when I2 is off Pulse Input I0 Q t Pulse Gate I
206. instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 42 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Like the LOD instruction the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND or OR instructions e Another way to accomplish the above is to use comparison instructions which are then followed by the AND LOD or OR LOD instructions Right Mouse Basic Instructions Program Flow Master Control Set MICS and Master Control Reset MCR Selecting Basic Instructions2 Program Flow Master Control Set MCS auto matically displays the instructions associated with the master control set You may also click the toolbar button Selecting Basic Instructions gt Program Flow Master Control Reset MCR automatically displays the instructions associated with the master control reset You may also click the toolbar button P The MCS function displays when select ing Master Control Set MCS The MCR function displays when select ing Master Control Reset MCR NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure 3 PLC Selection option 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 43 The MCS instruction is usually used in combination with the MCR instruction The MCS instruct
207. instructions are limited Conversion BCD To connect BCD digital switches BIN To connect hexadecimal digital switches 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 145 Input Points The inputs are used to read the data from the digital switches The quantity of required input points is always four Four input points must be reserved starting with the input number designated by I Make sure that actual input terminals are available for all input numbers Do not let the input numbers straddle the base and expansion stations in the expansion link system Output Points Outputs are used to select the digits to read The quantity of required output points is equal to the quantity of digits to read When connecting the maximum of five digital switches five output points must be reserved starting with the out put number designated by Q When an expansion unit is used with the base unit consecutive output numbers are allocated automatically between the base and expansion units Make sure that actual output terminals are available for all output numbers Do not let the output numbers straddle the base and expansion stations in the expansion link system Digital Switch Data Reading Time Reading digital switch data requires the following time after the input until the DGRD instruction is turned on Keep the input to the DGRD instruction for the period of time shown below to read the digital
208. ion can also be used with the END instruction instead of the MCR instruction When the input preceding the MCS instruction is off the MCS is executed so that all inputs between the MCS and the MCR are forced off When the input preceding the MCS instruction is on the MCS is not executed so that the pro gram following it is executed according to the actual input statuses When the input condition to the MCS instruction is off and the MCS is exe cuted other instructions between the MCS and MCR are executed as follows Instruction Status CNT Current values are held pulse inputs are turned off count out statuses are turned off OUT All are turned off OUTN All are turned on SET and RST All are held in the current status SFR Shift register bit statuses are held pulse inputs are turned off the output from the last bit is turned off SOTD Falling edges OFF pulses are not detected SOTU Rising edges ON pulses are not detected TIM TMH and TMS Current values are reset to zero time out statuses are turned off 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 44 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL e Input conditions cannot be set for the MCR instruction e than one MCS instruction can be used with one MCR instruction e Corresponding MCS MCR instructions cannot be nested within another pair of corresponding MCS MCR instructions Master Control Set MCS and Master Contr
209. isplay the instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the MOV instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option Data can be moved using the move MOV move not MOVN indirect move IMOV or indirect move not IMOVN instruction The moved data is 16 bit word data and the repeat operation can also be used to increase the quantity of data moved In the MOV or MOVN instruction the source and destination operands are designated by 51 and D1 directly In the IMOV or IMOVN instructions the source and destination operands are determined by the offset values designated by 52 and D2 S12D1 MOV SI R DI R RE When input is on 16 bit KOK word data from operand designated by S1 is moved to operand designated by D1 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1 Source 1 D1 Destination 1 0 35 Q 0 31 0 31 M 0 317 0 287 T 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 R 0 63 0 63 D Micro 0 99 0 99 D 0 498 0 498 Micro C Constant 0 65535 Repeat 1 31 1 31
210. isplays the instructions associated with the jump end You may also click the toolbar button Fy NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure 3 PLC Selection option 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 46 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The JMP instruction is usually used in combination with the JEND instruction At the end of a program the JMP instruction can also be used with the END instruction instead of the JEND instruction These instructions are used to proceed through the portion of the program between the JMP and JEND without processing When the operation instruction immediately before the JMP instruction is on the JMP is valid and the program is not executed When the operation result immediately before the JMP instruction is off the JMP is invalid and the pro gram is executed When the input condition to the JMP instruction is on and the JMP is executed other instructions between the JMP and JEND are executed as follows Instruction Status SOTU Rising edges ON pulses are not detected SOTD Falling edges OFF pulses are not detected OUT and OUTN All are held in the current status SET and RST All are held in the current status TIM TMH and TMS Current values and time out statuses are held
211. isters D21 through D25 with the comparison data in five consecutive data registers When data matches a corresponding internal relay is turned on The first CMP makes the following comparison and turns internal relays on D21 lt gt D30 gt M10 month D22 lt gt D31 gt M11 day D23 lt gt D32 gt M12 day of week D24 lt gt D33 gt M13 hour D25 lt gt D34 gt M14 minute The next CMP compares D21 D25 with 035 1039 and turns on internal relays M20 through M24 Subsequent CMP instructions make similar compar isons When the current time matches comparison data 1 of the month day hour and minute then internal relays M10 M11 M13 and M14 are turned on and out put QO is turned on When the current time matches comparison data 3 or 5 output QO is also turned on When the current time matches comparison data 2 of the month day hour and minute internal relays M20 M21 M23 and M24 are turned on and output QO is turned off When the current time matches comparison data 4 or 6 output QO is also turned off The day of week is not included in the comparison condition 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 137 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Interface Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Interface accesses a sub menu of instruc tions Display DISP Digital Read DGRD and Analog Read 0 ANRO Display DISP Selecting
212. isters for TXD instructions and for receive status data registers for RXD instructions If the same data register numbers are programmed as sta tus data registers for TXD and RXD instructions syntax error 80 will result Precautions for Programming TXD Instruction The Micro C has five formatting areas for executing TXD instructions Thus more than five TXD instructions cannot be executed at the same time An error code is set to the transmit status data register designated by oper and D2 in all excessive XD instructions and cannot be executed e Ifthe input fora instruction is turned on while another instruc tion is executed then the subsequent transmit instruction is executed two scan times after the preceding TXD instruction is completed e Since XD instructions are executed in each scan while an input is on a pulse input from an SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required e In the high speed processing mode user communication instructions XD and RXD cannot be used 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE Transmit Data 10 10 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Transmit data is designated by source operand 51 using constant values or data registers BCC codes can also be calculated automatically and appended to the transmit data One TXD instruction can transmit 200 bytes of data at the maxi mum S1 Source 1 Transmit Operand Conversion Transmit Notes
213. ith the flexible Find String feature WindLDR searches for a variety of text in a number of ways making it easier to handle large ladder files Use the menus of the context sensitive right mouse button for convenient access to the most commonly used commands Toolbars ladder file characteristics and other program features can be customized to the user s preferences The Tag Edi tor is a powerful way to access and edit all your coil data in one convenient place Printing your ladder diagrams is a snap with fully customizable formatting and convenient Print Preview Cross Reference and Tag Name features to fine tune your documents WindLDR can display mnemonics and or machine code with your ladder files The monitoring feature enables you to debug and observe real time PLC functionality right from your computer You no longer need to remember obscure codes and abbreviated commands with WindLDR it s just a simple drag and drop operation to create any instruction 1 INTRODUCTION 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 1 3 WindLDR allows you to open multiple ladder files so you can compare and reuse them instantly even if they are written for different PLCs The PLC Status dialog provides valuable information at a glance without remembering all those complicated function codes The Point Write dialog allows you to change the preset values of operands with out having to stop monitoring and r
214. ithin the Font dialog box select the font type style and size Once the appropriate font has been selected click the OK button To back out of this option without changing the font click the Cancel button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 40 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL NOTE The availability of fonts within the Font dialog box is dependent upon the fixed width fonts that are installed in Windows 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION The fifth menu option available is the Compile menu which allows you to con vert ladder files and to gather any errors created during the ladder conversion The following options may be selected rri Fer bins a LET YE bh Bb one Goin 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 7 COMPILE MENU 7 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Compile gt Convert Ladder Selecting the Convert Ladder option from the Compile menu allows you to con vert the entire current ladder to mnemonics Simply selecting the option is the only step necessary to use this feature When a ladder file completes its attempt at conversion the Ladder to Mnemonic Conversion dialog box displays When a ladder file successfully converts the message Conversion to mnemo nics succeeded Code file created displays z mM GNI 2 1 4 Click the OK button to acknowledge your successful conver
215. les 10 13 S1 Source 1 10 10 transmit digits bytes 10 13 Transmit Receive BCC dialog box 10 6 Constant Character dialog box 10 5 Data Type Selection dialog box 10 4 Variable Data register dialog box 10 5 TTL G 33 TXD BCC digits bytes 10 17 block check character BCC 10 15 conversion type 10 12 designating constant as 51 10 11 designating data register as 51 10 11 instruction 10 8 ladder diagram 10 8 operands 10 8 programming precautions 10 9 repeat cycles 10 13 S1 Source 1 10 10 transmit digits bytes 10 13 U undo 1 2 Undo option 4 2 Up Counter CNT instruction 9 26 Up Down Counter CUD instruction 9 26 Up Down Selection Reversible Counter CNT1 9 27 9 30 ladder diagram 9 30 Upload INDEX 2000 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX XXIII program option 8 21 operands 9 107 Upload dialog box 8 23 Repeat Operation 9 108 PLC Network Type 8 24 Transfer Mode 8 23 Z Upload From 8 23 Upload Program option 8 21 Zener Diode G34 UV Prom G 33 Zero Suppression G 34 V Variable Data register dialog box 10 5 variable range Pulse Width Modulation PWM 9 160 Vertical line option 9 4 View menu 5 1 Status Bar option 5 2 Tip Messages option 5 2 Tool Bar option 5 1 Volatile Memory G 33 Ww WindLDR features 1 2 wiring diagram Display DISP 9 141 Pulse Output PULS 9 156 Word G 33 Word Length G 33 Write G 33 X XORW instruction 9 103 ladder diagram 9 106
216. lick the option to be edited Once the appropriate option is highlighted click the Edit button Then the corresponding dialog box will display 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 8 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL For the steps associated with the Constant Character dialog box refer to page 10 4 For the steps associated with the Variable Data register dialog box refer to page 10 5 For the steps associated with the BCC dialog box refer to page 10 6 Transmit TXD Valid Operands Standard Processing Operand S1 D1 D2 Source 1 Destination 1 Destination 2 Function Transmit data Transmit comple Transmit status output Q 0 31 M 0 287 T R D 0 498 0 497 Constant 00h FFh mE Repeat 0 99 CEN 1O TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 9 Transmit data designated by operand 51 be maximum of 200 bytes When transmission is complete the output or internal relay designated by oper and D1 is turned on Destination 2 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the operand designated by D2 The transmit status data register designated by D2 stores the status of the transmission and the error code The next data register stores the byte count of transmitted data The same data registers cannot be used as trans mit status data reg
217. licking any of these icons provides quick access to the commands as listed below The top row of icons highlight the most common tasks associated with the menu bar The lower two rows execute the basic and advanced instructions specific to programming editing and debugging the actual ladders By positioning the cursor over any of the icons a pop up tip message will display the icon s function b Yee Cuwigpiv ne 15 Sl PEP Pl e en my pesca pen on ea ae 1 sts eng a 2 WINDLDR LEGENDS 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 2 5 Menu Commands Toolbar Icons D New Comment 24 CPAN lir Tag Browser 05 Select PLC a JE E Print Preview 29 Cut P Help Eal Copy Undo Find Le NOTE For complete instructions about the New Open Save Print and Print Preview options refer to Chapter 3 File Menu For complete instructions about the Undo Find and Edit Rung Comment 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 2 WINDLDR LEGENDS 2 6 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL options refer to Chapter 4 Edit Menu For complete instructions about the Select PLC option refer to Chapter 6 Con figure Menu For complete instructions about the Upload Program and Download Program options refer to Chapter 8 Online Menu For complete instructions about the Help
218. llocation Numbers Use the numeric allocation numbers to specify the destination of the HSCI comparison outputs Operand Symbolic Numeric Output 00 07 020 027 200 207 220 227 Qi0 Qui Q30 Q31 210 211 230 251 Internal 0 7 150 157 400 407 550 557 OPEM 10 17 160 167 410 417 560 567 20 27 170 177 420 427 570 577 M30 M37 180 187 430 437 580 587 40 47 190 197 440 447 590 597 50 57 200 207 450 457 600 607 60 67 210 217 460 467 610 617 70 77 220 227 470 477 620 627 80 87 M230 M237 480 487 630 637 90 97 240 247 490 497 640 647 100 107 250 257 500 507 650 657 110 117 M260 M267 510 517 660 667 120 127 270 277 520 527 670 677 130 137 280 287 530 537 680 687 140 147 540 547 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 181 Input Filter and Input Frequency The Micro and Micro C have hard and soft filter functions Only the hard filter works on high speed counter instructions The hard filter settings affect the input response The maximum input frequency for the 5 instruction is 5 kHz Output Delay in High Speed Counter HSC1 After the HSC1 has counted the Nth input pulse the preset value the output or internal relay designated as the destination of the comparison result is turned
219. mber corre sponds to the lowest bit number in the string The number of bits is the second required address after the SFR NOT instructions The SFRN instruction requires three inputs The reverse shift register circuit must be programmed in the following order Reset input Pulse input Data input SFR and NOT instructions Two required addresses MV BS ee i ce 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 37 Reverse Shift Register SFRN The last bit status output can be programmed directly after the SERN instruction with two required addresses entered In this example the status of bit R20 is read to output QO e Each bit can be loaded using the LOD R instructions 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 38 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Bi Directional Shift Register A bi directional shift register can be created by first entering in the SFR instruc tion with two addresses as explained in the Forward Shift Register SFR section on page 9 34 Then enter the SFR and NOT instructions with two addresses as explained in the Reverse Shift Register SFRN section on page 9 36 Reset Bi Directional Shift Register 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 39 Right Basic Instructions Counter Comparison Selecting Basic Instructions gt Counter Comparison 3 Equal CC displays the Counter Comparison CC dialog
220. mber of columns specified Show Rungs Clicking this option displays left and right power rails con Continuously tinuously Show Clicking the Show Mnemonics and this option displays Machine Code the machine code under each coil after compiling Coil Parameters To specify the parameters of each coil on the rung enter an appropriate figure in each field You may click the up and down arrows to select the figures as well Coil Width Enter the width of each coil in pixels Coil Height Enter the height of each coil in pixels Line Width Enter the width of each line in pixels Tag Enter the number of tag comment lines to be allowed with Comment Lines each tag name This number be up to 100 lines however it is recommended that you restrict the tag comment lines to 4 lines This number is fixed until the number is changed again within this field 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 39 Once the appropriate ladder preferences have been selected click the OK button To back out of this option without changing any preferences click the Cancel button To access on line help press the Help button The Ladder Preferences dialog box also gives you the option to change the screen fonts by clicking the Font button This displays the Font dialog box visual example of the selected font will display in the Sample field 5 W
221. mber of inputs and outputs for the expansion PLC FA Series Controller Configuration If any of the FA series are highlighted when the Configure button is pressed the ee Ene i dka HO 2 Note This dialog box is the same for FA1J FA2J and FA3S CP11 CP12 and CP13 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 6 Open Net Controller Configuration If the ONC is highlighted when the Configure button is pressed the following dialog box displays 1 cid dali OE Mob SE 317 E LC mrp A zo 0 L R UTT ta al Xtra 34 FS UE Tap Laas Fo Note There is no need for additional configuration 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 7 MicroSmart Controller Configuration If the MicroSmart is highlighted and the Configure button is pressed the follow ing dialog box is displayed a Fn bb oS dcc Lb Le ro 4 TE zum So Enea l 40x i Mick il Voppaenp d Lm eee Ub dd Vom oe m a 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 8 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Configure gt Function Area Settings Selecting the Function Area Settings option from the Configure menu allows you to set internal functional settings
222. n At the expansion station inputs start at 120 and outputs start at Q20 Inputs and outputs are allocated depending on the Micro C base P P 8 units used in the expansion link system as shown below yo Points Micro C Micro C Points In Out Base Station Expansion Station I O Total Allocation Allocation Numbers Numbers 16 9 7 16 0 10 17 110 Q0 Q6 24 14 10 24 I O Type 10 17 10 15 Q0 Q7 Q10 Q11 32 18 14 16 0 16 I O Type 10 17 110 Q0 Q6 120 127 130 020 026 40 23 17 16 1 0 Type 24 I O Type 10 17 110 Q0 Q6 120 127 130 135 Q20 Q27 Q30 Q31 40 23 17 24 I O Type 16 I O Type 10 17 110 115 120 127 130 020 026 90 97 Q10 Q11 48 28 20 24 I O Type 24 I O Type I0 I7 110 115 120 127 130 135 Q0 Q7 Q10 Q11 020 027 Q30 Q31 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 1 18 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Special Internal Relay Allocation Numbers Internal relays M290 through M317 are special internal relays with the following functions Allocation Description CPU Power OFF Number Stopped M290 Catch input status set Operating Cleared see note Input 10 M291 Catch input status set Operating Cleared Input M292 Catch input status set Operating Cleared Input 12 M293 Catch input status set Operating Cleared Input 3 M294 Catch input status set
223. n and the error code The next data register stores the byte count of transmitted data The same data registers cannot be used as transmit status data registers for TXD instructions and for receive status data registers for RXD instructions If the same data register numbers are programmed as status data registers for TXD and RXD instructions syntax error 80 will result 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Insert To create a new transmit or receive instruction click the Insert button The Data Type Selection dialog box will display 28 T Eurum Hee x Cancel C Tom Help either Constant Character Constant Hex decimal Variable 3 In the Type field click the circle to the left of the desired option Data register or BCC Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to save the data type To back out of this dialog box without selecting a data type click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button If the Constant Character option is selected in the Type field of the Data Type Selection dialog box then the Character field will display in the Constant Character dialog box If the Constant Hex decimal option is selected in the Type field of the Data Type Selection dialog box then the Hex decimal field will display in the Constant Character dialog box 1O TRANS
224. n count many input pulses in one scan and make it possible to count high speed pulses faster than the scan time If the high speed counter counts input pulses repre senting a position the current position can be determined This function is use ful for position control The HSCO is a high speed counter with a single stage comparison function When the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value 4 294 967 295 maximum a designated output or internal relay is turned on The HSCI is a multi stage comparison counter The preset value and output data is programmed in data registers When a preset value is reached 4 294 967 295 maximum a designated output or internal relay is turned on The HSC2 is a pulse output control counter used with the PULS pulse output instruction When a preset value is reached a designated output or internal relay is turned on and output pulses at output QO is turned off The HSC3 is a gate controlled counter without a comparison function When the gate input is turned off the current value is moved to a designated data register 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 167 High Speed Counter Specifications Hard Filter Value 10 High HSCO HSC1 HSC2 HSC3 Speed Counter Counted 0 to 0 to 0 to 0 to 4 294 967 295 4 294 967 295 4 294 967 295 65 535 FFFF FFFFh FFFF FFFFh FFFF FFFFh FFFFh
225. n order to assure their proper coordination Interrupt To temporarily disrupt the normal sequence of events on command GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 19 Isolated Refers to digital I 0 where the devices are on a dif ferent voltage sources i e Each 1 0 has a separate return ground line Isolation The voltage difference between external devices and the controller logic incorporated in the I 0 modules for rejection of electrical noise J Jitter Undesirable vibration on a display image on a dis play surface Jump A command to go from one sequence of instruc tions to another Jumper A short length of wire used to close a break and make a connection between terminals in a circuit L Ladder Diagram An industry standard for symbolically representing control logic relay systems Language A formal system of symbols and rules to express and communicate information data between people and machines Least Significant Digit digit in a numbering system which represents the smallest value 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 20 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Left Justified 1 A field of numbers which have no zero s 0 to its left 2 An element re positioned to the upper left most location possible of the programming matrix Line Printer A high speed output device that prints an entire line of characters as a unit Load 1 A de
226. nal in electrical circuit capable of interfering with the desired signal GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 23 Nonvolatile Memory A memory that retains it s information when power is lost or removed Octal Numbering A base eight 8 numbering system where only the System digits 0 through 7 are used Off Line Describes equipment or devices which are not involved in direct communications with the pro grammable logic controller Ohm s Law Currents I in terms of electromotive force E and resistance R given in the equation I E R On Line Describes equipment or devices which are involved in direct communications with the programmable logic controller On Line Operation That time when the programmable logic controller is scanning the inputs and updating the outputs accordingly Opto Isolator A logic device using light and a photo detector as a isolator OR A logic operation having the property that if A and B are logic inputs then the single output of A and B will only be ON if at least one of the two is ON as shown below 0 off 1 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 24 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A B AorB 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 Output Information transferred from the programmable logic controller to a output device or to external storage Output Devices Devices such a solenoids motor starters etc that receive their c
227. ne does not contain a con tact This error tells the user that a short circuit exists before the given address 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2 16 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Error 008 A short circuit starts after WindLDR gives the approximate location of each end of the short circuit A short circuit occurs when a path length is zero A path is created by the connection of lines in a rung A short circuit occurs when a horizontal ladder line does not contain a con tact This error tells the user that a short circuit exists after the given address Error 009 A short circuit exists in the area of A short circuit occurs when a path length is zero A path is created by the connection of lines in a rung A short circuit occurs when a horizontal ladder line does not contain a con tact This error tells the user that a short circuit exists in the given area of the rung WindLDR cannot pin point the exact location of the short circuit because of the different power flow of the ladder line APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A2 17 Error 010 A short circuit bypasses WindLDR states the type of coil that is skipped by the short circuit short circuit occurs when a path length is zero A path is created by the connection of lines in a rung A short circuit occurs when a horizontal ladder line does not contain
228. ng a finite number of words Micro Processor The central processing unit implemented in rela tively few integrated circuits which contain Arith metic Logic Register and Memory functions Microsecond One millionth of a second 1 x 10 6 or 0 000001 second Millisecond One thousandth of a second 1 x 10 3 or 0 001 second Also expressed as 11157 Mode A method of operation i e programming mode search mode etc 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 22 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Modem Abbr MOdulator DEModulator Used to describe the device applied to convert terminal information for communications over telephone lines or other communications medium Monitoring Control A central programmable logic controller used in an application where the process is continually checked so that the operator may be alerted to pos sible malfunctions Most Significant Digit digit in a numbering system that represents the greatest value Multiplexin The process of transmitting multiple signals from 9 5 pie sig different sources over a common cable or transmis sion line by causing Natural Binary A number system to the base of two 2 in which the ones 1 and zeros 0 have a weighted value in accordance with their relative position in the binary word NEMA Standards Property characteristics adopted as the standard by the National Electrical Manufactures Association Noise An extraneous sig
229. nicate with each other NOTE Check your PLC s hardware manual to determine the appropriate com munication mode settings to use 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 27 To accept the default settings according to the following table leave the diamond to the left of the Standard Mode option clicked To set up your own communication mode settings click the diamond to the left of the Optional Mode option Standard Mode Optional default Baud Rate 9600 bps 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps Data Bits 7 7 8 Stop Bits 1 1 2 Parity Even None Odd Even Terminator CR carriage return CR carriage return Gode CR LF carriage return line feed Receive 50 msec Select within the range of 10 msec Time Out to 255 msec Input N A Defined by the type of inputs on Moar the PLC being used 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 28 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Control Data Register This option contains information related to the operation status of the PLC seep pies os rame puras eee Det ew A ss Pega Grae 7 snnt dme De pa Oni Ma Aamir ka i alea LESA com gna oim foe pesca T fur Tue deen Select which of the control data registers are essential for operation by clicking the square to the left of e
230. nitor base unit system codes base unit processing mode codes general error codes user program exe cution error codes days of the week hours minutes seconds and the scan times Direct Monitor Dialog Box Type of data displayed 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 15 allocation numbers in the white fields of the Direct Monitor Dialog 5 To monitor operand commands use the following table to enter screen Press the TAB button to navigate between entry fields At any time click the Cancel button to return to the monitoring screen To access on line help press the Help button To Monitor Instruction Example Inputs Enter I plus the allocation number 10 Outputs Enter Q plus the allocation number Ql Timers Enter T plus the allocation number 12 Counters Enter C plus the allocation number C3 Shift Registers Enter R plus the allocation number R4 Internal Relays Enter M plus the allocation number M5 Data Registers Enter D plus the allocation number D6 Link Registers Enter L plus the allocation number L100 ONC only As operands are entered the corresponding values of each will display in the gray field to the right 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 16 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The method of entering operands follows the syntax of the PLC communica tions protocols
231. nitor gt Online gt PLC status Then click the Clear button in the Tim Cnt Change Status field The displayed status will switch from CHANGED to UNCHANGED Bit Set Reset 5 set or reset the values of inputs outputs internal relays and shift registers complete the following steps within the Bit Set Reset field Press the TAB button to navigate between entry fields At any time click the OK button to return to the monitoring screen To access on line help press the Help button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 20 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL NOTE These operands can only be changed while the PLC is in run mode Addition ally the input status will be maintained for the length of one scan only The sta tus continually updates with the newly read scan information To Set or Reset Instruction the Values of Inputs Outputs Enter the desired allocation number into the white box Internal Relays of the Bit Set Reset field Press the TAB key Shift Registers If the operand is OFF 0 will display in the gray box If the operand is ON 1 will display in the gray box To set this operand click the Set button To reset this operand click the Reset button NOTE You may also right click with your mouse to set reset a selected Internal Relay or Output Coil as long as the selection does not conflict with the program logic Online gt Monitor Online gt Batch Monitor Thi
232. not use data register D99 as destination operand D1 Otherwise a user program syntax error occurs and error indicator ERRI is lit When using a bit operand such as an internal relay for the destination 32 internal relays are required so do not use internal relay M251 or a larger number as destination operand D1 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 99 Repeat Operation in the ADD SUB and MUL Instructions Source operands 51 and S2 and destination operand D1 can be designated with repeats individually or in combination When destination operand D1 is not designated with a repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 When a repeat is designated as many consecutive operands as repeat cycles starting with the designated operand are used Since the repeat operation works similarly on the addition ADD subtraction SUB and multiplication MUL instruc tions the following examples are described using the ADD instruction When only S1 source is designated with a repeat the final result is set to desti nation operand D1 ADD SIR 52 D1 REP D10 D20 D30 3 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 D20 D20 D20 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 100 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When only S2 source is designated with a repeat the final result is set to desti nation operand D1 ADD 51 52 DI REP D10 D20 D30 3 S1 Repea
233. nput Boolean Equation G 7 groups 6 24 Boot G 8 input number 6 24 borrow flags 9 95 CC 9 6 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX instruction 9 39 ladder diagram 9 41 CC gt 9 6 instruction 9 39 ladder diagram 9 41 CDP instruction 9 26 CD ROM 1 7 Central Processing Unit CPU G 9 change preset values 8 17 Counters 8 18 Data Registers 8 18 Timers 8 18 Channel G 9 Character G 9 Checksum G 9 Clear G 9 CLKR instruction 9 122 ladder diagram 9 128 operands 9 128 CLKW instruction 9 122 ladder diagram 9 129 operands 9 130 Clock G 9 Clock Read CLKR instruction 9 122 ladder diagram 9 128 operands 9 128 Clock Write CLKW instruction 9 122 ladder diagram 9 129 operands 9 130 CMP 9 78 9 78 instruction 9 78 INDEX IV WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL ladder diagram 9 81 9 82 operands 9 81 CMP instruction 9 78 CMP gt instruction 9 78 CMP 1 instruction 9 78 CMP2 9 86 instruction 9 78 ladder diagram 9 88 operands 9 87 CNT 9 6 9 43 9 46 instruction 9 26 CNTO 9 27 9 28 ladder diagram 9 29 CNT1 9 27 9 30 ladder diagram 9 30 CNT2 CNT31 9 27 9 31 ladder diagram 9 32 Coaxial Cable G 10 Code G 10 Coil option 4 5 Coil Selection dialog screen 1 6 coils 1 3 Communication Error option 8 5 Communication Settings option 6 35 Communication Port Settings 6 36 PLC Network Settings 6 36 Communications Settings dialog box 5 2 Compare CMP operands 9 81 Compare Equal To CMP dialog box 9 79 Comparison INDEX
234. nput I2 Q Hard Reset Input P t Reset 16 Bit Counter Soft Reset M315 M316 Overflow Status 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 196 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Gate Input in High Speed Counter HSC3 As shown in the figure above pulse input 10 and gate input 12 are connected in AND circuit If gate input 12 is turned on and off while pulse input 10 is on then the gate pulses are counted as shown below Pulse Input 10 i Gate Input I2 Pulse Count HSC3 E Current Value When gate input 12 is on HSC3 counts ON pulses to input 10 Pulse Input 10 Gate Input I2 Pulse Count HSC3 Current Value When gate input 10 is on HSC3 counts ON pulses to input 12 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 197 10 Pulse input n Hard reset input HSC3 is reset when is on because the hard reset is set to HIGH 12 Gate input 10 Soft reset input to turn on soft reset special internal relay M315 M301 is the initialize pulse special internal relay used to turn on soft reset special internal relay M315 at start up While hard reset input I1 is off and gate inpu
235. ns which can be used are LOD LODN and gt Error 015 is not LOD equivalent A rung must begin with an input equivalent instruction LOD LODN or CC gt Error 016 cannot follow a LOD equivalent instruction This instruction is not valid here Input equivalent instructions cannot precede the following instructions JEND END and MCR APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 2 19 Error 017 Output area has no OUT equivalent instructions Each rung must end with an output equivalent coil There is more than one output instruction missing There fore WindLDR flags an error showing that there are no out put equivalent instructions in the rung This error will occur if the rung is large and if there are multiple areas where there are no output equivalent instructions Error 023 Input is shorted to the power rail The LPR being connected to the RPR means that there is a direct path from the LPR to the RPR via only horizontal or vertical lines This is not allowed in WindLDR Communication Error List See the General Error Codes on page A3 1 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES A2 20 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Operand Error List These error messages describe mistakes in the coil allocation or operand numbers Error 000 Allocation number is not assigned Each instruction requires a valid alloc
236. nstruction is on then the SOTU output turns on If input 12 to the SOTU instruction turns off while input is 10 Qo I0 Q1 on then the SOTD output turns on If input I1 turns on while input I2 is on then the SOTU output turns on How ever if input I1 turns off while input I2 is on the SOTD output does not turn on 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 22 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Basic Instructions Timer Selecting Basic Instructions Timer 100 msec Timer TIM displays the 100 msec Timer TIM dialog box Selecting Basic Instructions gt Timer gt 10 msec Timer TMH displays the 10 msec Timer TMH dialog box Selecting Basic Instructions gt Timer 31 msec Timer TMS displays the 1 msec Timer TMS dialog box You may also click the toolbar button Ei Cnr field either 100 msec 10 msec 1 msec 3 Click the circle to the left of the appropriate selection in the Type Then enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Next enter the appropriate operand in the Allocation Number field In the Preset Value field enter the amount of time to which the timer times down 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 23 Finally optionally enter any associated comment the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog
237. nter CNT displays the Up Counter CNT dialog box Selecting Basic Instructions gt Counter gt Dual Pulse Counter CDP displays the Dual Pulse Counter CDP dialog box Selecting Basic Instructions gt Counter gt Up Down Counter CUD displays the Up Down Counter CUD dialog box You may also click the toolbar button Up Counter CMT T r Tag Home mx Di Hu uee IPs end Up AD ma Wakes Tag Ham amant wor Cun Click the circle to the left of the appropriate selection the gt field either Up Dual Pulse or Up Down Then enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Next enter the appropriate operand in the Allocation Number field In the Preset Value field enter the quantity to which the counter counts up 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 27 Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the counter instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without setting up a counter click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the rig
238. nu bd be a eid ette Suet Syke 8 1 Online Monitor 8 2 Online Monitor Online Link Map 8 4 Online Monitor Online Communication Error 8 5 Online Monitor Online PLC status 8 5 Status Dialog ONC Micro and Micro C 8 5 Online Monitor Online Direct monitor 8 14 Online Monitor Online Point Write 8 17 Online Monitor Online Batch Monitor 8 20 Online Upload program 8 21 Upload Dialog 8 23 Online Download program 8 24 PLC Download Dialog 8 24 Chapter 9 Editing the adden ode n eoo lari epa e aue whee 9 1 Right Mouse Edit rung comment 9 2 Right Mouse Help 9 3 Right Mouse Line 9 3 Right Mouse Basic Instructions 9 4 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Normally Closed 9 10 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Output OUT 9 12 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Output Not OUTN 9 14 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Set SET 9 16 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL V Right Mouse Basic Instructions Reset RST 9 18 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Single Output 9 20 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Timere 9 22 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Counter 9 26 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Shift Register 9 33 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Counter Comparison 2 23 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Program Flow Master Control Set MCS and Master Control Reset MCR 9 42 Right Mouse Basic Instructions Program Flow Jump JMP and Jump End J
239. o rotate 1 Before rotation CY MSB LSB 1 1010 110110 0111110 M303 Rotate to the left After rotation MSB LSB 010 1 F1 0 i o 1 LISTS 1 1 0 0 M303 Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1 Source 1 Bit Function Data for bit rotation Quantity of bits to rotate Q _ M E T I me C 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 120 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL R D Micro 0 99 D 0 498 Micro3C Constant 0 15 Repeat Since the bit rotate instructions are executed in each scan while an input is on a pulse input from an SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required MOV 51 D1 REP 40966 D10 i ROTL SI bit D10 1 M301 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the Micro or Micro C starts operation the move MOV instruction sets 40966 to data register D10 Each time input IO is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is rotated to the left by one bit as designated by the operand bit The status of the most significant bit MSB is set to a carry special internal relay M303 Rotate Right ROTR ROTR SI bit 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 121 When an input is on the 16 bit data of the data register designated by S1 is rotated to the right by the quantity of bits d
240. oft filter functions Only the hard filter works on high speed counter instructions The hard filter settings affect the input response The maximum input frequency for the HSC2 instruction is 5 kHz 4 kHz when using the program loader 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 190 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Block Diagram HSC2 Pulse Output Control HSC2 counts input pulses to input I0 When the preset value is reached the comparison output is turned on and pulse output QO is turned off The pulse output frequency is determined by the pulse output PULS instruction Pulse Input 10 Pulse Hard Reset Input Soft Reset M315 Reset 32 Bit Counter Preset Value 32 Bit Comparison Register Pulse Output Pulse Output 0 Comparison Output When the preset value is reached the preset value is turned off 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 191 Output Delay in High Speed Counter HSC2 After the HSC2 has counted the Nth input pulse the preset value the output or internal relay designated by destination operand D1 is turned on with a delay as shown below Pulse Input 10 on E HSC2 Current Value EA Output Pulse ON 90 msec maximu Stop Signal OFF 4 gt Comparison Result ON 300 msec maximur D1 Output OFF ON Outpu
241. ol Reset MCR Multiple Usages of MCS Instructions This master control circuit will give corresponding priority to 13 and I5 When input is off the first MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs 12 through I6 are forced off When input is on the first MCS is not executed so that subsequent programs are executed according to the actual input statuses of 12 through I6 When I1 is on and 13 is off the second MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs 14 through 16 are forced off When both and 15 on the first and second MCS are not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of 14 through 16 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 45 Counter and Shift Register in Master Control Circuit When input 10 is off MCS is executed so that the subsequent input is forced off When input 10 is on MCS is not executed so that the following program is exe cuted according to the actual input statuses NOTE Pressing the MCS R key on the program loader programs the MCS or MCR instruction alternately Right Basic Instructions Program Flow Jump JMP and Jump End JEND Selecting Basic Instructions2 Program Flow gt Jump JMP automatically dis plays the instructions associated with the jump You may also click the toolbar button m Selecting Basic Instructions Program Flow gt Jump End JEND automatically d
242. on Slower than parallel for the equivalent clock rate However only one 1 chan nel or wire is required for serial operation Setpoint The required or ideal value of a controlled variable usually preset in the system s controller by the operator 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY lt 1 4 36 10 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Shift To move information serially right or left in the register s within the programmable logic control ler Shift Register A storage area for bits in which the information is input by shifting bits or bit patterns in either direc tion Representing some sequence of events as opposed to numerical values Can be operated either synchronously or asynchronously Sign The symbol or bit which distinguishes the positive or the negative value of a given number Significant Digit A digit that contributed to the precision of a numeral The number of significant digits is counted beginning with the digit contributing the most value called the significant digit and ending with the least significant digit Software The user program which controls the operation of a PLC Solid State Devices Electronic components that control electron flow through solid materials such as crystals transistors diodes and integrated circuits State The logic 0 OFF or 1 ON condition in the PLC s memory or at a circuit s input or output module GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION
243. onditions exist from only the First Digit Error Code chart 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES A2 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When control data register D92 is enabled using FUN10 the general error code is stored in D92 First Digit Error Codes Error Code User CRC WDT Error Power Display Program Compari Failure Error Item CRC Error son Code Keep Error O no error 1 X 2 X 3 X X 4 X 5 X X 6 X X 7 X X X 8 9 X X A X X B X X X x x D X X X E X X X F X X X X APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A2 3 Second Digit Error Codes Error Code User Keep Data Program TIM CNT Display Program Sum Sum Preset Error Item Syntax Check Check Value Error Error Error CRC Error O no error 1 X 2 X 3 X X 4 X 5 X X 6 X X 7 X X X 8 9 X X A X X B X X X X X D X X X E X X X F X X X X 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES A2 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Third Digit Error Codes Error Code Display User Program System Program Error Item Writing Error Error O no error 1 X 2 X 3 X X Micro 1 Error Causes and Actions Keep Data Sum Check Error If timer counter data or internal relay on off statuses stored in the base unit R
244. onfigure gt PLC Selection option 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL S1 S2 gt D1 D2 IMOV 51 2 D1 R D2 REP When input is on the values contained in operands designated 51 and 52 added to determine the source of data The 16 bit word data so determined is moved to the destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in operands designated by D1 and D2 Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1 Base S2 Offset D1 Base D2 Offset addressto for S1 address to for D1 move move to from 0 35 0 35 0 35 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 M 0 317 0 287 0 287 0 287 T 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 31 R 0 63 0 63 0 63 0 63 D Micro 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 99 D 0 498 0 498 0 498 0 498 Micro C Constant tar a Repeat 1 31 1 31 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 71 9 72 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL NOTE When used in the high speed processing mode possible operands are limited When timer or counter is designated as 51 52 or D2 the operand data is the current value of the timer counter When T or C is designated as D1 the operand data is the timer counter preset value which can be 0 through 9999 Make sure that the source data determined by S1
245. ontext sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option Use the Output Not OUTN instruction to transfer the inverted result of a bit logical operation to the specified operand There is no limit to the number of OUTN instructions that can be programmed into one rung However programming multiple outputs of the same output number is not recommended If this must be done separate the outputs with the Jump JMP Jump End JEND Master Control Set MCS or Master Control Reset MCR set of instructions When the same output address is programmed more than once in one scan the output nearest to the END instruction is given priority 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 15 The following chart provides all OUTN operands Instruction Standard High Speed mm Q 000 031 000 011 M 000 287 000 047 R tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field 5 Accept the default Output Not the field Then enter the Next enter the appropriate operand in the Allocation Number field Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines
246. ontrolling signal from a programma ble logic controller Overflow In an arithmetic operation the generation of a quantity beyond the capacity of the storage register of location which is to receive the result Parallel Operation Type of information transfer where by all bits of a word are handled simultaneously Parallel Output Simultaneous availability of two or more bits channels or registers Parity Bit A binary digit appended to a array of bits to make the sum of all the bits always odd or always even GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 25 Parity Check A diagnostic check that tests whether the numbers of ones or zeros in a array of binary digits is ODD or EVEN Typically performed on words in memory to insure they have not been altered in storage or transmission PC Abbr Programmable Controller and or Personal Computer Peripheral Equipment used to input or receive output data from a system Typically printers color operator interfaces CRT s act Pilot Type Device An electromechanical switch or set of relay contact which energizes a control circuit which in turns energizes a high current load PLC Abbr Programmable Logic Controller Port A communication channel between devices Precision The degree of discrimination with which a quan tity is stated e g A three digit numeral discrimi nated among 1000 possibilities Precision is contrasted
247. or indicator ERRI is lit at the base station When the error is at the expansion station error indicator ERRI is lit at both the base and expansion station 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES A2 10 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL If this error has occurred at output QO or Q20 then remove the cause of the overload the output will then restore normal operation automatically Clear the error code using FUN20 on the program loader 400Oh Sensor Power Overload Error 24V Overload This error indicates that the sensor power supply from the Micro is overloaded Both error indicators and ERR2 will be lit When this error occurs at the base station in the expansion link system error indicators ERR1 and ERR2 are lit at the base station When the error is at the expansion station ERR1 and ERR2 are lit at both the base and expansion sta tions To correct this error reduce the sensor power output load within the rated value Then either turn the power to the Micro off and on or clear the error code using FUN20 on the program loader 800h Calendar Clock Error Calendar NG This error indicates that the real time calendar clock in the Micro base unit has an error caused by invalid clock data due to a voltage drop or by erroneous quartz oscillator operation Clear the error code using FUN20 and set the calendar clock data using FUN28 on the program loader Turn the power off and on again If the error
248. or switch setting to 1 6 on slave station units Turn the power off and on again for the slave station unit Then turn the power off and on for the master station unit Or execute the link for matting sequence FUN27 for the master station using the program loader 8h User Program CRC Error Users Prg CRC This error indicates that the user program stored in the Micro EEPROM is bro ken Transfer a correct user program to the Micro or Micro C and clear the error code using FUN20 on the program loader 10h Timer Counter Preset Value CRC Error TIM CNT CRC This error indicates that the execution data of timer counter preset values is bro ken Clear the error code using FUN20 on the program loader then the timer counter preset values are initialized to the values of the user program Note that modified preset values are cleared and the original values are restored when the error code is cleared 20h User Program Sum Check Error Prg Sum Check This error indicates that the data of the user program compile area in the Micro or RAM is broken When this occurs the user program is recompiled automatically Clear the error code using FUN20 on the program loader then the timer counter preset values are initialized to the values of the user program Note that modified preset values are cleared and the original values are restored when the error code is cleared APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2001 IDEC CORPORATIO
249. ore data or information Documentation An orderly collection for the purpose of authenti cating hardware and software information Double Precision Data requiring two words or registers to process because of data requirements Dump The process of putting the contents of memory on a magnetic tape or disk Duplex Two way data transmission Full duplex allows simultaneous data transmission in both directions Half duplex allows data transmission in either Direction But Only One Direction At A Time Dynamic Display A CRT screen display which is continuously updated 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 14 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL EEPROM Abbr Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory A read write non volatile type of memory which uses electrical charges to main tain the program and reprogram Edit To deliberately modify the user s program in the processor s memory Element An individual component within a programmable logic controller s program Encode To convert data by the use of a code in such a man ner that re conversion to the original form is possi ble EPROM Abbr Erasable Programmable Read Only Mem ory A nonvolatile memory which requires approxi mately a 30 minute exposure to a ultra violet light in order to be reprogrammed Error 1 The difference in value between actual response and the desired response in the performance of a controlled machine system o
250. ost Significant Digit G 22 MOV 9 58 instruction 9 57 ladder diagram 9 58 9 60 operands 9 59 repeat operation 9 61 Move MOV 9 58 instruction 9 57 ladder diagram 9 58 9 60 operands 9 59 repeat operation 9 61 Move Not MOVN 9 58 instruction 9 64 ladder diagram 9 65 9 66 operands 9 65 MOVN 9 58 instruction 9 64 ladder diagram 9 65 9 66 operands 9 65 MUL instruction 9 92 ladder diagram 9 98 operands 9 94 repeat operation 9 99 multi level undo 1 2 multiple ladder files 1 3 multiple undos 4 2 Multiplexing G 22 Multiplication MUL instruction 9 92 ladder diagram 9 98 operands 9 94 repeat operation 9 99 Multi stage Comparison HSC1 allocation numbers 9 177 allocation numbers numeric and symbolic 9 180 instruction 9 175 ladder diagram 9 176 9 182 multi stage data setting 9 179 operands 9 177 output delay 9 181 multi stage data setting Multi stage Comparison HSC1 9 179 Natural Binary G 22 NEMA Standards G 22 New option 3 2 No Operation NOP instruction 9 206 Noise G 22 Nonvolatile Memory G 23 NOP instruction 9 206 Normally Closed LODN instruction 9 10 operands 9 10 Normally Open LOD instruction 9 8 operands 9 8 NOT 9 6 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX XV instruction 9 36 Not NOT 9 6 Not Equal To CMP instruction 9 78 Octal Numbering System G 23 Off Line G 23 Ohm s Law G 23 ONC 1 1 1 4 1 5 8 24 Communication Port dialog box 6
251. out 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 140 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Conversion BCD To connect decimal display units BIN To connect hexadecimal display units Latch Phase and Data Phase Select the latch and data phases to match the phases of the display units Output Points The quantity of required output points is four plus the quantity of digits to dis play When displaying the maximum of five digits nine consecutive output points must be reserved starting with the first output number designated by operand Q Make sure that actual output terminals are available for all output allocation numbers Do not let the output numbers straddle the base and expan sion stations in the expansion link system Display Processing Time Displaying numerical data requires the following time after the input until the DISP instruction is turned on Keep the input to the DISP instruction for the period of time shown below to process the display data Scan Time Display Processing Time Less than 5 ms 10 ms 1 Scan Time x Quantity of Digits 5 ms or More 3 Scan Times x Quantity of Digits 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 141 Example DISP DISP 51 Q LAT DAT o LBCD4 cio 00 L L When output I0 is on the four digit current value of counter C10 is displayed on the seven segment digital display unit Wiring Diagram Micro Base Unit F
252. pared with each other The comparison results are set to operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by D1 CMP2 SIR S2R DIR REP D20 D30 M50 3 16 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 D20 D21 030 031 50 022 023 032 033 51 024 025 034 035 52 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 92 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Binary Arithmetic Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Binary Arithmetic accesses a sub menu of instructions Addition ADD Subtraction SUB Multiplication MUL and Division DIV Binary arithmetic instructions make it possible for the user to program computa tions using addition subtraction multiplication and division For addition and subtraction operands internal relay M303 is used as the carry or borrow flag Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Binary Arithmetic gt Addition ADD dis plays the Addition ADD dialog box You may also click the toolbar button Trp 1 n2 01 O eain Mulliplislan nane apani 0 Divum 3 In the Type field click the circle of the appropriate selection Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper S1 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indi
253. pendix 1 for more information Error 205 Allocation number must be octal Refer to the Allocation Table in Appendix I for more information Error 4206 Allocation number is not valid for this PLC Refer to the Allocation Table in Appendix 1 for more information Error 207 instruction is not valid for APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES TION PLC with which you are working with See the instruction s reference page for more information GLOSSARY A AC Coupled Amplifier amplifier in which only AC signals ampli fied and DC signals are totally ignored AC Input Module Device which converts various AC input signals originating in the user s switches to the appropriate logic level required for use within the programma ble logic controller AC Output Module Device which converts the low voltage logic levels of the processor CPU to output signals for con trol of a user s field device or load Access Time The time interval between the instant at which information is 1 Called for from storage and the instant at which delivery is completed i e The read time 2 Ready for storage and the instant at which storage is completed i e The write time Accumulator A register in the logical arithmetic section of the processor It is commonly used for intermediate storage of arithmetic results or other intermediate operations 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 2 WINDLDR R
254. per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the normally closed instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the normally closed instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 12 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Basic Instructions Output OUT Selecting Basic Instructions gt Output OUT displays the Output OUT dia log box You may also click the toolbar button Trp lag Hane fe Akazia 1 Mundie a lag Hane Lt 1 x Cae Help NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option Use the Output OUT instruction to transfer the result of a bit logical opera tion to the specified operand There is no limit to the number of OUT instructions that can be programmed into one rung However programming multiple outputs of the same output number is not recommended If this must be done separate the outputs with the Jump JMP Jump End JEND Master Control Set MCS or Master Control Reset MCR set of instructions When the same output address is programmed more
255. perand from which data will be moved Enter the tag name or nickname the upper S2 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below This is the amount of the offset from which data will be moved 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 70 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper D1 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat This is the first operand which data will be moved Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper D2 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below This is the amount of the offset to which data will be moved Optionally enter any associated comment in the tag name comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines If Repeat is selected enter the number of repeats in the REP field Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the IMOV instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the C
256. power up when there has been a power failure Check the box to the left of this option to select it The All Keep option designates all the internal relays in use to keep their status when there is a power failure Thus upon power up the status of internal relays M0 M287 for Micro and Micro C 0 2557 for the ONC will remain the same Click the circle to the left of this option to select it The Set option retains the status of all internal relays upon power up prior to the relay entered in the accompanying field Click the circle to the left of this option to select it Then enter the appropriate internal relay number in the field to the right Enter the range to set the bound ary of internal relays which will retain their current states upon power up NOTE Input numbers ending in 8 or 9 are not valid SFR Keep Shift register bits R0 R63 for Micro and Micro C RO R254 for the ONC are cleared in the event of a power failure It is possible however to designate a range of shift register bits to retain their types when the program is restarted The Clear option also the default setting clears all of the current shift register bits upon power up when there has been a power failure Click the diamond to the left of this option to select it 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 22 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The All Keep option designates all shift registers in use to keep their sta tu
257. presents each decimal as a Decimal four 4 bit binary code of 1 or 0 BCD DEC 0000 0 0001 1 0010 2 0011 3 0100 4 0101 5 0110 6 0111 7 1000 8 1001 9 Binary Number System A base 2 numbering system in which numbers are represented by 1 and 09 Binary Word A related grouping of 1 s and 09 whose mean ing is determined by position or whose numerical value is designated by the binary system of num bers GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 7 Bipolar Refers to transistors in which the working current consists of both positive and negative electrical charges and flows through two 2 types of CARRY A condition occurring during addition when the sum of two digits in the same column exceeds the base The carry digit is added to the next column Bit A contraction of binary digit the smallest unit of information in binary notation A bit is a Zero 0 or a One 1 Bit Rate The rate at which binary digits or pulses repre senting them pass a given point of the communi cations line Block A variable or fixed group of bits or words handled as a unit Block Diagram A simplified schematic representing major electri cal components Boolean Algebra A logical algebra system named after its inventor George Boole that represents ON OFF relation ships symbolically as implied by the operators i e AND OR NOT Boolean Equation
258. program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M304 The ERRI indicator the Micro or base unit will also be turned on Since these Boolean instructions are executed in each scan while an input is on a pulse input from an SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Repeat Operation in the ANDW ORW and XORW Instructions Source operands 51 and 52 and destination operand D1 be designated with repeats individually or in combination When destination operand D1 is not designated with a repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 When a repeat is designated as many consecutive operands as repeat cycles starting with the designated operand are used Since the repeat operation works similarly on the AND Word ANDW OR Word ORW and Exclusive OR Word XORW instructions the following examples are described using the ANDW instruction 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 109 When only S1 source is designated with a repeat the final result is set to desti nation operand D1 ANDW SIR S2 DI REP n D10 D20 D30 3 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 D10 2 020 030 D11 D20 030 D12 D20 D30 When only S2 source is designated with a repeat the final result is set to desti nation operand D1 ANDW 651 S2R DI REP D10 D20 D30 3 I2 S1 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repe
259. put I1 is on constant 810 designated by 51 is inverted bit by bit and moved to data register D2 designated by D1 D2 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 68 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The source data of decimal 810 designated by S1 is converted into 16 bit binary data The on off statuses of the 16 bits are inverted and moved to data register D2 Before inversion 810 MSB LSB J amp HEN After inversion 64725 LSB D2 6472 810 00 11515 51 D10 REP D2 D20 D D10 NOT gt D2 D30 When input I2 is on that data in data register D10 designated by S1 is inverted bit by bit and moved to data register D2 designated by D1 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 69 Right Advanced Instructions Move Indirect Move IMOV Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Move Indirect Move IMOV displays the Indirect Move IMOV dialog box You may also click the toolbar button ILS ILES En IR M ACY 51 32 Di DE Niven mm pat j 17 Inda Huar Hut r ease na asa insi 3 Accept the default Indirect Move in the Type field Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper S1 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat This is the first o
260. put and Output Capability Typically references the maximum quantity of inputs and outputs that a programmable logic con troller can accommodate Modules 1 Input cards modules convert the higher field input voltages required for the field device to the low level input signal used by the processor 2 Output cards modules convert the low level pro cessor control signals to a usable level for field devices 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 18 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Frame A device that houses a quantity of I 0 modules referred to as the 1 0 RACK Scan A procedure the processor follows to monitor inputs and control the output devices Inhibited Pertaining to a state of processing unit in which certain operations are not allowed to occur Initialize To set to a starting position Input The data supplied to a programmable logic con troller for processing Input Devices Devices such as limit switches pressure switches operator push buttons etc that supply data to the programmable logic controller Other inputs include analog devices and digital encoders Instruction A set of bits which will generate certain prescribed operation to be performed by the programmable logic controller Interface A device that allows communications between sys tems or ports of different systems Interlock To arrange the control of machines or devices so their operation is interdependent i
261. put that has a pulse width of at least 0 5 milliseconds received at input 10 is read and stored in this special internal relay This is a read only register M291 M297 691 697 Unused M300 700 Unused M301 M302 701 702 Sets the start stop control These special internal relays can be used to start or stop the Micro 1 PLC APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 2001 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A1 3 M303 703 Sets all outputs off When this internal relay is turned on all outputs 0 5 and 10 17 turned off Self holding circuits using out puts 0 5 10 17 also are turned off and are not restored when M303 is turned off Internal relays and shift registers remain unchanged M304 704 Sets the initialize pulse When the Micro 1 starts operation IR704 goes on for a period of one scan time M305 312 705 712 Unused M313 713 Sets the clock reset 1 millisecond When this internal relay is set IR714 which generates clock pulses for timers will be set to zero M314 714 Sets the internal 1 second clock This is a one second clock This special internal relay generates clock pulses for timers The pulses oscillate at 500 milli second on and 500 millisecond off R714 will be on only if IR713 is off This is a read only register 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS
262. r Ladder Preview Function Area Settings Pro gram Compare Cross Reference and Tag Name To simply print the ladder program choose Ladder then click OK You may also click the toolbar button 5 File gt Listings gt Ladder Preview Selecting the Ladder Preview option from the File gt Listings menu displays the pages of the ladder file as they would appear when printed You may view one or two pages at a time You may also click the toolbar button E 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 3 FILE MENU 3 6 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Depending upon the printer device you have installed the Print Preview dialog box will reflect the printer s configuration Follow the instructions enclosed with your printer for specific printing instructions File2 Listings Cover Page Selecting the Cover Page option from the File menu will allow you to create a cover page for the project and print it separately from the ladder screen File gt Listings Function Area Settings Selecting the Function Area Settings from the File menu will allow you to view certain PLC settings with an option to print them File2 Listings Program Compare Selecting the Program Compare option will allow you to compare two code files the uploaded file from a PLC and the working file for match or mis match File gt Listings Cross Reference Selecting the Cross Reference option from the File gt Listings menu will display the reference of all the oper
263. r D2 field Then enter the associated operand in the allocation number field below This is the amount of the offset to which data will be inverted and moved Optionally enter any associated comment in the tag name comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines If Repeat is selected enter the number of repeats in the REP field Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to display the IMOVN instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the IMOVN instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure 3 PLC Selection option S1 S2 NOT gt D1 D2 H IMOVNSI R S2 DI R D2 REP When an input is on the values contained in operands designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the source of data The 16 bit word data so determined is inverted and moved to the destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in operands designated by D1 and D2 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Operands Possible Standard Processing Mode Operand S1
264. r process 2 An indi cation of a problem with hard ware or software within the programmable logic controller Escape The process of returning to the previous mode of operation GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 15 Execution The performance of a specific operation as accom plished through processing programmed instruc tions Execution Time The total time required to complete the execution of the specific operation F Failure The termination of the capability of a functional unit to perform its required function A failure is the effect of a fault Fault An accidental condition that causes a functional unit to fail or to perform in the required manner Fault Current The maximum electrical current far in excess of normal current that will flow in a short circuited system prior to the actuating of any current limit ing device Feedback The signal or data returned to the programmable logic controller from a controlled machine or pro cess to indicate it s response to the control signal File An organized collection of documents or data Filter A device used to suppress electrical noise Firmware A series of instructions for internal use by the pro cessor only 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 16 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Fixed Point A notation of numbers where all numeric quanti ties are expressed by a set of digits with the decimal point impli
265. racter can be any character on the keyboard ASCII charac ter The constant hex decimal can be any hex code The constant hex deci mal also includes all ENQ characters of the American National Standard Institute ANSI i e 0X00 to OXFF The destination operand specifies the 16 bit word data to store the result of the Macro instruction The destination operand 1 D1 serves as the beginning of the data register while destination operand 2 D2 serves as the ending of the data register When D1 is set the Macro instruction looks at the length of S1 to set D2 The user does not set D2 it is set by the Macro instruction 5 Complete the fields as displayed below in the field descriptions Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate the macro instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the Macro instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button Type The Macro instruction remains selected in the Type field 51 When set up descriptions of the source operands display in the 1 field Clicking on any of these instructions displays the corresponding macro information To set up a new macro click the Insert button Refer to page 9 201 for more information 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 200 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL D1 Originally when no instructions are entered only one white field dis plays below the
266. rdware recommendations 1 8 Head G 17 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX 9 188 HSC3 allocation numbers 9 193 block diagram 9 195 gate input 9 194 9 196 hard reset selection 9 194 input filter and input frequency 9 195 instruction 9 191 ladder diagram 9 192 operands 9 194 soft reset special internal relay M315 9 194 1 0 G 17 1 0 Capability G 17 1 0 Frame G 18 1 0 Modules G 17 1 0 Scan G 18 icons advanced instruction 2 7 basic instruction 2 8 IMOV 9 58 instruction 9 69 ladder diagram 9 71 9 73 operands 9 71 IMOVN 9 58 instruction 9 74 ladder diagram 9 78 operands 9 76 Indirect Move IMOV 9 58 instruction 9 69 ladder diagram 9 71 9 73 operands 9 71 INDEX X WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Indirect Move Not IMOVN 9 58 instruction 9 74 ladder diagram 9 78 operands 9 76 Inhibited G 18 Initialize G 18 Input G 18 input off to on 9 20 on to off 9 20 Input Devices G 18 input filter Gate Control HSC3 9 195 input frequency Gate Control HSC3 9 195 Insert Column instruction 9 207 instruction 9 206 Ladder Line instruction 9 207 Rung instruction 9 207 Insert option 4 4 installation of software 1 7 Instruction G 18 Integration G 21 Interface G 18 Interface instructions 9 137 Interlock G 18 Internal Relay set reset 8 20 Interrupt G 18 Isolated I 0 G 19 Isolation G 19 J JEND 9 6 INDEX 2000 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL INDEX XI instruction 9 12 9 14 9 45 operation
267. repeats different results are set to the three operands starting with D1 ANDW SIR 528 DIR REP D10 D20 D30 3 I7 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 D10 D20 D30 D11 D21 D31 D12 D22 D32 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Bit Shift and Rotate Selecting Advanced Instructions Bit Shift and Rotate gt accesses a sub menu of instructions Shift Left SFTL Shift Right SFTR Rotate Left ROTL and Rotate Right ROTR Bit shift and rotate instructions are used to shift the 16 bit data in the data regis ter designated by source operand S1 to the left or right by the quantity of bits designated The result is set to the data register designated by source operand S1 and a carry special internal relay M303 Since the bit shift and rotate instruc tions are executed in each scan while the input is on a level input or pulse input should be used as required 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 113 Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Bit Shift and Rotate gt Shift Left SFTL displays the Shift Left SFTL dialog box You may also click the toolbar button AFT Trp 51 fe GNI Da Tea Rare pone n bow C Bular Lell 7 Ialma ligh Cenni Cancel Hel 5 In the Type field click the circle of the appropriate selection Enter the tag name or nickname in the S1 Tag Name
268. res intermediate results and 1 reads inverted contact status MCS Master Starts a master control 1 Control Set MCR Master Ends a master control 1 Control Reset NOT Not Inversion OR Or Parallel connection of NO contacts 1 OR LOD Or Load Parallel connection of circuit blocks 1 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL ORN Or Not Parallel connection of NC contacts OUT Output Outputs the result of bit logical operation OUTN Output Outputs the inverted result of bit Not logical operation RST Reset Resets output internal relay or shift register bit SET Set Sets output internal relay or shift register bit SFR Shift Forward shift register Register SFRN Shift Regis Reverse shift register ter Not SOTD Single Out Falling edge differentiation output put Down SOTU Single Rising edge differentiation output Output Up TIM Timer Subtracting 100 msec timer 0 1 to 999 9 sec TMH Timer Subtracting 10 msec timer 0 01 to 99 99 sec TMS Timer Subtracting 1 msec timer 0 001 to 9 999 sec 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 7 9 8 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Basic Instructions Normally Open Selecting Basic Instructions gt Normally Open displays the Normally Open LOD dialog box You may also click the toolbar button HH eT Kama Open C Haus Lan
269. rks on high speed counter instructions The hard filter settings affect the input response The maximum input frequency for the HSCO instruction is 10 kHz Block Diagram HSCO Single Stage Comparison HSCO counts input pulses to input I0 When the preset value is reached the comparison output is turned on Pulse Input I0 Pulse Hard Reset Input Reset 32 Bit Counter Soft Reset M315 Preset Value 32 Bit Comparison Register Comparison Output 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 173 Output Delay in High Speed Counter HSCO After the 5 0 has counted the Nth input pulse the preset value the output or internal relay designated by destination operand D1 is turned on with a delay shown below Pulse Input 10 on HSCO Current Value o N 1 N N I N 2 E E da iun 300 msec Maximum gt Comparison Result ON D1 Internal Relay OFF Next Scan END Execution When an output is designated as destination operand D1 the maximum output delay can be 300 microseconds not including the delay in the hardware When an internal relay is designated as destination operand D1 the delay can be one scan time maximum 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 174 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Example HSCO HSCO 51 D1
270. rol HSC2 allocation numbers 9 187 block diagram 9 190 instruction 9 185 INDEX XVIII WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL ladder diagram 9 186 operands 9 187 output delay 9 191 Pulse Width Modulation PWM equation 9 160 instruction 9 156 ladder diagram 9 158 9 162 operands 9 158 output pulse width ratio 9 159 variable range 9 160 PWM equation 9 160 instruction 9 156 ladder diagram 9 158 9 162 operands 9 158 output pulse width ratio 9 159 variable range 9 160 Q Quick keys 2 1 editing keys 2 1 RAM G 27 Read G 27 Real Time G 27 Real time Clock Calendar instructions 9 122 receive completion output 10 32 data byte count 10 34 digits 10 23 format 10 21 status 10 33 INDEX 2000 IDEC CORPORATION status codes 10 33 Receive RXD block check character BCC 10 29 conversion type 10 24 designating constant as end delimiter 10 27 designating constant as start delimiter 10 26 designating data register as S1 10 22 instruction 10 1 10 19 ladder diagram 10 19 operands 10 19 programming precautions 10 20 repeat cycles 10 25 S1 Source 1 10 21 skip 10 28 Register G 27 Remote I 0 G 27 repeat operation ADD ladder diagram 9 96 ADD SUB and MUL 9 99 ANDW ORW and XORW 9 108 Boolean Computation ladder diagram 9 109 comparison instructions 9 84 Double Word Comparison 2 9 88 move MOV instructions 9 61 Reset RST 9 7 instruction 9 18 operands 9 18 Reverse Shift Register SFRN 9 36 instruction 9 33 l
271. rom your ladder pro gram Click on the position which you wish to delete the ladder instruction A gray box will highlight this area Then select Delete Ladder Line to remove the ladder line which is high lighted by the gray box Select Delete gt Column to remove the column which is highlighted by the gray box Select Delete gt Rung to remove the rung which is highlighted by the gray box 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 208 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Split Rung Selecting Split Rung separates two rungs of your ladder program Within your ladder program click on the ower of the two ladder rungs which you wish to separate A gray box will highlight this area Then select Split Rung to separates these two rungs Right Mouse Join Rung Selecting Join Rung connects two rung of your ladder program Within your ladder program click on the upper of the two ladder rungs which you wish to join A gray box will highlight this area Then select Join Rung to connect these two rungs Right Mouse Disable Rung Selecting Disable Rung makes the functionality of the rung latent The instruc tions will remain visible on the rung however its function will be disabled Within your ladder program click on the rung of the ladder which you wish to disable A gray box will highlight this area Then select Disable Rung Disabled rungs appear gray on the ladder diagram 9 EDITING THE LADDER
272. rotect or Enable Protect Scan Time This field displays the current amount of times it takes to complete one loop of the program in milliseconds The scan time is updated every scan Scan Time Max This field displays a record of the longest amount of time since the PLC started it has taken to complete one loop of the program in milliseconds The maximum scan time is updated every scan 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 13 PLC Status Dialog Box continued PLC Type This field displays the configuration of the attached PLC base unit PLC Version This field displays the version number of the attached PLC unit Device Number This field displays the device number assigned to the PLC which is currently communicating with the program Reset Press this button to re initializes the communications port Emergency When all else fails click the Reset PLC button in the Emergency field to reset the current PLC 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 14 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Online gt Monitor gt Online gt Direct monitor The Direct Monitor Dialog screen monitors inputs outputs internal relays shift registers preset and current values of timers and counters and the data of data registers NOTE For the Micro series the control data registers D90 D99 can be monitored during run mode operations Use these registers to mo
273. rrent PLC Once this option is selected the following monitor ing screen will display See See 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 3 NOTE Ifyou have more than one file opened while using Monitor mode you can only monitor the file which is running in the PLC To return to ladder editing screen select the Monitor option from the Online menu again From the Monitor display modified versions of some menu items are available Menu Option Function File Exit WindLDR Ends the WindLDR program Edit Find Searches for tag names allocation numbers and tag name comments View Tool bar Toggles the main toolbar at the top of the display on and off Status bar Toggles the status bar at the base of the display on and off Tip Messages Toggles the tip messages on and off Ladder preferences Displays the Ladder Preferences dialog box from which to select rung and coil preferences NOTE For more detailed information about the preceding menu options refer to their corresponding chapters 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 4 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Additionally new options are available from the Online menu m TOIT EP LATTE bh Bb one os T Tap m hi Odie at abs Ca erri redi ene 5 Coe a
274. s gt gt but ton displays the Error Code Dialog screen To return to the monitor mode click the OK button To access on line help specific to the highlighted errors press the Help button 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 9 The following table displays a list of the most common error numbers and descriptions Error Number Error Description 1 Power failure 2 WDT watchdog timer error 3 CRC comparison code keep error 4 User program CRC error 5 Timer counter preset value CRC error 6 Program sum check error 7 Keep data sum check error 8 User program syntax error 9 System program error 10 User program writing error 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 10 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Calendar The current date YY MM DD day of the week and time based on a 24 hour clock display To update any calendar information click the Change gt gt button The Set Calen dar and Time dialog box will display a Iu ml the new date and time within the PLC Status Dialog screen 3 Once all changes have been made click the OK button to record To return to the PLC Status Dialog screen without making any changes click the Cancel button Calendar The current date MM DD YY displays in this field Click on the month date or year Then enter the new digits to correct each individ ually 8 ONL
275. s not programmed then a user program execution error will also result NOTE When a user program execution error occurs the result is not set to the destination 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 57 Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Move Move Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Move gt Move MOV displays the Move MOV dialog box You may also click the toolbar button eal 1 Tap Ham Allazshzn Mura m manam Far kama Tail Email help 5 Accept the default Move in the Type field Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper S1 field Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat This is the operand from which data will be moved Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper D1 field Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat This is the operand to which data will be moved 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 58 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Com ment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines If Repeat is selected enter the number of repeats in the REP field Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to d
276. s option allows you to monitor an array of inputs outputs timers counters data registers and so forth by simply selecting the operand Li x x a E E x 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 21 3 To monitor your programs in batches 1 Click Online Monitor from the Menu Commands toolbar 2 Click Online Batch Monitor from the Menu Commands tool bar 3 Type the desired operand and starting address 4 Scroll forward and backward by clicking the or buttons Online gt Upload program Selecting the Upload program option from the Online menu allows you to upload a file from your PLC and convert it to a ladder file on your PC 8 You may also click the toolbar button 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU 8 22 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Then PLC Selection Dialog screen will display ee ee 48 MIS jl Eleepo ze abe ida Biram 2 fee eS Tuer al a 1 m E leer loe 7 4 ANS s Pis 1 Hu ru ci of an ipe J Click on the desired PLC to select it Then press the OK button To back out of this option click the Cancel button To access on line help press the Help button 8 ONLINE MENU 2001
277. s pressed this option will be turned off entirely Communication Device Number Use the communication device registration number to allocate a device number 1 to 255 to each of the PLCs connected in a 1 N communication computer link system Hkc F taam fee comm me EI d a 4 m ud ir Micro 1 FA Series 2001 6 CONFIGURE 6 16 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Loader Port Settings There are 2 selections Standard Mode and Optional Mode The Optional Mode allows you to select the desired communication settings and to switch to the setting automatically with a designated input NOTE The List icon displays the PLC functions and details in a notepad file for mat Maximum I O FA Series only The Maximum I O selection allows the user to determine the maximum num ber of inputs and outputs which the CPU will be mapping LIIS IINE NIESE TUN M You can choose from 72 to 128 inputs and outputs 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 17 Remote I O CP 12 and CP13 only The Remote I O option allows you to select the remote condition group Syn chronous vs Asynchronous and to select the remote digital switch number User Interrupt 12 1 only The User Interrupt allows for a 10msec or 5msec clock interruption
278. s that are suitable for transmission over communication lines See Modem 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 12 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Data Terminal A device where a programmable logic controller s or computers memory data can enter or leave the system See CRT Terminal Debugging The identification and elimination of mistakes in hardware wiring equipment and the software user s program Decoder The circuitry used to interpret data and detect an individual address Diagnostic Program A test program within the processor or user mem ory used to help isolate hardware and or software malfunctions within the PLC Differential See RS 422 Digital Data Data represented in discrete discontinuous form as contrasted with continuous analog data Digital data is usually represented by means of coded char acters e g numbers signs symbols etc Digital to Analog A device which transforms digital data into analog Converter data Disabled A program interruption to a sequence line pre venting normal operation of that sequence GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 13 Discrete 1 Separate and complete 2 Pertaining to data in the form of distinct elements or physical quanti ties having distinctly recognizable values Digital ON or OFF I Os are often referred to as discrete I Os Disk Drive A memory system which uses a rotating magnetic disk to st
279. s when there is a power failure Thus upon power up the shift register bits will retain their states either 0 or 1 Click the diamond to the left of this option to select it The Set option retains the shift register bits upon power up of all regis ters prior to the number entered in the accompanying field Click the diamond to the left of this option to select it Then enter the appropriate register number in the field to the right Enter the range to set the boundary of shift register bits which will retain their current states upon power up Processing Mode Micro and only Choose between two modes of processing Normal and Speed Hn gt The Normal processing mode also the default has an average processing time of 2 2 usec with a minimum processing time of 1 2 psec The average scan time is 2 9 usec per step 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 23 Use the Speed or high speed processing mode as a sensor controller or when executing a user program at high speed is necessary The average processing time is 0 45 usec with a minimum processing time of 0 2 psec The average scan time is 400 psec per 100 steps NOTE In high speed mode control data registers 090 099 cannot be used NOTE When high speed mode is selected for the Micro series the I O expansion link and data link functions cannot be used 3 and Micro c only
280. sest to the END instruction has priority over a previous instruction for the same output No output is initiated until all logic within a scan is processed Output occurring simultaneously is the first part of the END instruction execu tion The second part of the END instruction execution is to monitor all inputs also done simultaneously Then program instructions are ready to be processed sequentially once again Right Mouse gt Advanced Instructions Selecting Advanced Instructions with the right mouse button accesses the Advanced Instructions sub menu Hes hod Gants bon c pen poo Eee See Tiam Be Ba SUCH a Uan Darn damn Hz Usman LEI 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 51 NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure 3 PLC Selection option Group Symbol Name Addr s Available on NOP 0 NOP No operation 1 Micro base units Move 11 MOV Move 30r4 12 MOVN Move not 30r4 3 13 IMOV Indirect move 5 or 6 All pose base units 14 IMOVN Indirect move not 5 or 6 Macro Macro instruction Com 21 CMP Compare equal to 4 or 5 parison 2
281. shortcut to the WindLDR executable file and double click on the icon that is created 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 8 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Hardware Software Recommendations WindLDR will run on a Pentium based PC running Microsoft Windows 95 or 98 with at least 24MB of available RAM and Windows 2000 or NT4 0 with 32MB of available RAM 1 INTRODUCTION 2001 1 2 WINDLDR LEGENDS Throughout the WindLDR software a number of quick keys icons and alloca tions exist This chapter will demystify their naming conventions and their corre sponding functionality Quick Editing Keys Quick keys are keys on your PC s keyboard that when pressed execute a consistent command The functions of the following quick keys are explained as follows Editing Keys Key Description Arrow SHIFT Draw a vertical line downward move the cursor Down one position down CONTROL Erase the vertical line starting at the current position move the cursor one position down Arrow Left SHIFT Draw a horizontal line one position left CONTROL Erase the horizontal line one position left Arrow SHIFT Draw a horizontal line one position right Right CONTROL Erase the horizontal line one position right 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 2 WINDLDR LEGENDS 2 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Arrow Up SHIFT Draw a verti
282. sion When a ladder conversion is unsuccessful the message Conversion to mnemonics failed Code file not created View errors p marin ome mr ode rd Jor mn e To view the errors which prevented a successful conversion click the Yes button The Error Message Dialog box displays To ignore the Error Message Dialog screen click the No button 7 COMPILE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 7 3 Compile gt Show Errors Selecting the Show Errors option from the Compile menu displays a log of any and all errors created through the Convert Ladder option This menu is only active when errors have occurred in the ladder to mnemonic conversion You may also access this screen by clicking the OK button from the Ladder to Mnemonic Conversion dialog box Bic cro omp D us Using the Up and Down buttons you may scroll through the errors in the ladder file Once you have used the Up and Down buttons to highlight an error you may click the OK button The Error Message Dialog screen disappears and the selected erroneous rung is highlighted for correction TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS Click the error message in question to highlight it Then press the Help button to access on line help for specific assistance in troubleshooting the error To exit out of this d
283. struction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse but ton instructions for another PLC select the Configure gt PLC Selection option The display DISP instruction is used to display 1 to 5 digits of the current val ues and data register data of the timer counter on seven segment display units DISP 1 Q LAT DAT Conversion BCD or BIN o Latch Phase Data Phase Quantity of Digits Low or High Low or High 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 139 When an input is on the data designated by source operand 51 is set to the out put designated by destination operand Q This instruction is used to output seven segment data to display units NOTE The DISP instruction can be used on transistor output type Micro base units only The DISP instruction can be used only once in a user program Valid Operands Standard Processing Operand S1 Source 1 Q Destination lt Q 0 25 M gt T 0 31 0 31 R D Micro 0 99 D 0 498 Micro3C Constant Repeat When timer or counter is used as 51 or 52 the current value of the timer counter is read
284. struction for counted values This instruction will constantly compare counted values to the value that has been programmed When the counter value equals the given value the coil turns on The gt instruction is an equal to or greater than comparison instruction for counted values This instruction will constantly compare counted values to the value that has been programmed When the counter value is equal to or greater than the given value the coil turns on When a counter comparison instruction is programmed two addresses are required The circuit for a counter comparison must be programmed in the fol lowing order 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 41 1 CC or CC gt instruction 2 Counter number 0 through 31 3 Preset value to compare from 0 to 9999 decimal constant or data register Data registers DO through D99 are available in the standard processing mode and DO through D31 in the high speed processing mode Counter with which to compare Equal Counter C2 Comparison CC 10 Q0 Preset value to compare Counter with which to compare Greater Than or gt C3 Equal Counter 715 Comparison gt Ql Preset value to compare The CC and gt instructions can be used repeatedly for different preset values comparison instructions only compare the counted value The status of the counter does not affect this function e The comparison
285. structure and length Pulse A brief voltage or current surge of a measurable duration R RAM A Random Access Memory in a addressable LSI device used to store information data This memory is a Read Write and is volatile Read To copy usually from one from of storage to another particularly from external or secondary storage to internal storage To sense the presence of information on a recording device or medium Real Time Pertaining to the performance of a computation during the actual time that a related physical pro cess transpires in order that the results of the com putation can be used in guiding the physical process Register A memory device capable of containing one or more computer bits or words Remote The capability of locating 1 0 frame rack long distances from the processor s rack 2001 IDEC CORPORATION GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 28 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Justified Term applied to a field of numbers which exists in a memory cell location or register possessing no significant zeros 0 to it s right ROM Abbr Read Only Memory a nonvolatile digital storage device specified for a single function Data is permanently loaded into a ROM memory and is available whenever needed Routine series of computer instructions which performs a specific limited task every time it is called up Rung grouping of PLC instructions symbols which controls an o
286. switch data Scan Time Digital Switch Data Reading Time Scan Time gt Soft Filter 3 msec 2 2 Scan Times x Quantity of Digits 1 Scan Time lt Soft Filter 3 msec 2 Soft filter 3 msec x Quantity of Digits 1 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 146 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The following example demonstrates a program to read data from four digital switches to a data register in the 16 point transistor sink output type Micro or Micro C base unit Example DGRD When input 15 is on the four digit value from BCD digital switches is read to data register D10 Analog Read 0 ANRO Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Interface gt Analog Read 0 ANRO displays the Analog Read 0 ANRO dialog box You may also click the toolbar button E Aning Deni Tag Haver Tam Hare De i Help 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 147 The Analog Read 0 option in the Type field remains selected Enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field This is the operand used to read to the data register designated as the des tination Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line
287. t 0 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 When only D1 destination is designated with a repeat the same result is set to the three operands starting with D1 ADD S1 S2 DIR D10 D20 D30 S1 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 101 When S1 and S2 source are designated with a repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 ADD SIR SR D1 REP D10 D20 D30 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 When S1 source and D1 destination are designated with a repeat different results are set to the three operands starting with D1 ADD SIR 52 DIR D10 D20 D30 3 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 102 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When S2 source and D1 destination are designated with a repeat different results are set to the three operands starting with D1 ADD 51 S2R 16 D10 D20 D30 3 S1 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 103 When all operands are designated with a repeat different results are set to the three operands starting with D1 H ADD SIR S2R DIR REP D10 D20 D30 I7 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 D20 D21 D22 NOTE Special internal relay M308 carry borrow is turned on when a carry or borrow occurs in the last oper
288. t I2 is on the HSC3 instruction counts input pulses to input I0 When gate input I2 is turned off HSC3 stops counting and the current value is moved to data register D20 When gate input I2 is turned on again HSC3 continues counting from the existing current value When hard reset input I1 or soft reset input I10 is turned on the HSC3 current value is reset to zero 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 198 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL When the current value exceeds 65535 HSC3 overflow special internal relay M316 is turned on to signal an overflow Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Macro Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Macro displays the Macro dialog box 3 You may also click the toolbar button 5 T nde 2 The Macro instruction is available with the Micro and Micro C PLCs Macro instruction uses MOV instructions to move data to PLC data registers This instruction creates software instructions only the macro instruction does not exist in the PLC itself The Macro instruction has three operands source operand S1 destination operand 1 D1 and destination operand 2 D2 The source operand specifies the 16 bit word data to be processed by the Macro instruction It can be entered with two types of data the Constant Character and the Constant Hexadecimal 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 199 The constant cha
289. t Input Number setting 6 10 Run Stop setting 6 9 special internal relays A1 2 Upload dialog box 8 23 allocation numbers A1 12 Catch Input 6 23 Communication Device Number 6 26 configuration 6 4 Control Data Register 6 28 Download dialog box 8 24 error causes and actions 2 7 error codes A2 5 expansion control data registers 1 23 Function Area Settings 6 18 Input Filter Time Selection 6 24 Keep functions 6 20 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX INDEX XIV WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Processing mode 6 22 Run Stop setting 6 19 special internal relays A1 18 Status 8 5 Status dialog screen 8 6 Upload dialog box 8 23 Micro Processor G 21 Microsecond G 21 MicroSmart 1 1 1 5 Communication dialog box 6 34 Download dialog box 8 24 Function Area Settings 6 34 Keep functions dialog box 6 34 Others dialog box 6 34 Run Stop settings dialog box 6 34 Special Input dialog box 6 34 Upload dialog box 8 23 MicroSmart Controller Configuration 6 7 Millisecond G 21 mnemonics 1 2 Mode G 21 Modem G 22 Monitor Batch Monitor option 8 20 Communication Error option 8 5 Counters 8 15 Data Registers 8 15 Direct Monitor dialog box 8 14 display 8 3 Inputs 8 15 Internal Relays 8 15 Link Map option 8 4 menu items 8 3 mode 8 3 option 8 2 INDEX B OR ere 7 Outputs 8 15 Point Write dialog screen 8 17 Shift Registers 8 15 syntax 8 16 Timers 8 15 Monitor option 8 2 monitoring 1 2 Monitoring Control G 22 M
290. t QO Gate Control HSC3 Selecting Advanced Instructions gt High speed Counter Gate Control HSC3 displays the Gate Control HSC3 dialog box HSC3 You may also click the toolbar button 85 Im ema Pieter Vram 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 192 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL High or Disable This selection is used to reset the current value of 5 In the HSC3 field click the circle of the appropriate selection Low the high speed counter 3 Enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Then enter the associated operands in the Allocation Number field below Finally optionally enter any associated comments in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate the high speed instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the high speed instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button Gate controlled high speed counter HSC3 counts input pulses to input 10 while gate control input 12 is on When gate control input 12 is turned off the current value is moved to the data register designated by destination operand D1 The HSC3 does not compare the current value with a preset
291. te click the OK button to activate the pulse instruction on your ladder To back out of this instruction without utilizing the pulse instruction click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button The pulse width modulation PWM instruction is used to generate pulse out puts of a 51 2 25 6 3 2 or 1 6 msec period with a pulse width that can be var ied between 0 4 and 100 increments 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 158 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The PULS and PWM instructions can be used on transistor output type Micro or Micro C base units only PWM 51 MODE When input is on output QO generates pulse output The period of the pulse output is selected from 51 2 25 6 3 2 or 1 6 msec The output pulse width ratio is determined by the source operand 51 according to the equation on page 9 160 When the input is off output QO remains off NOTE Either the PULS or PWM instruction can be used only once in a user program Valid Operands Standard Processing Operand S1 Source 1 Function Pulse width coefficient D 0 99 for Micro 0 498 for Micro C Constant 0 249 The pulse cycle period base selection cannot be changed during operation To change the duty ratio during operation use a data register as source operand 51 and change the value of the data register If the value of the data register designated as 1 is b
292. te terminal is ready for receiving data or is sending valid data 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS A1 28 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL The DSR control signal option can be used only in the user protocol to commu nicate through the loader port D490 O DSR is not used for data flow control When DSR control is not needed set 0 to D490 D490 0 is the system default 0490 1 When DSR is on the Micro C can transmit and receive data D490 2 When DSR is off the Micro C can transmit and receive data Doom When DSR is on the Micro C can transmit data This function is usually called busy control and is used for controlling transmission to a remote termi nal with a slow processing speed such as a printer When the remote terminal is busy data input to the remote terminal is restricted D490 4 When DSR is off the Micro C can transmit data This function is contrary to D490 3 D490 5 When DSR is on the Micro C can receive data D490 6 When DSR is off the Micro C can receive data D490 7 Same as D490 0 DSR is not used for data flow control APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS B Om 1 fe 7 wale WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A1 29 D489 DTR control signal option When group 2 is the enabled as expansion control data registers D489 is used to control the Data Terminal Ready DTR signal to indicate the Micro C operat ing status or
293. tems always print Follow these directions to easily complete all procedures Action items requiring a specific entry will be printed for example as enter 1234 at the prompt Menu instructions are separated by an arrow gt For example Click Config ure PLC Selection indicates for you to click Configure from the Menu Commands toolbar and then to click PLC Selection from the drop down menu The majority of the WindLDR screens and dialog boxes are applicable to all PLC types However some screens and dialog boxes differ depending on the PLC type Unless there is a difference among PLC types all screen and dialog box examples in this tutorial will reflect the Open Net Controller ONC PLC 1 INTRODUCTION 2001 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 1 5 Within this reference manual Chapters 3 through 8 describe the options avail able from the Menu Commands toolbar Chapter 9 includes details about all the basic and advanced instructions which allow you to program and edit your lad der Finally Chapters 10 and 11 explain the advanced instruction mainly appli cable to the Micro PLC series For details on other PLC s like the FA series the ONC and the MicroSmart please refer to the appropriate user s manual Basic instructions are applicable to all PLC types However advanced instruc tions are only applicable to certain PLC s On Line Help The detailed set of Help screens is lik
294. that of the source Core Memory A device used to store information in ferrous cores which may be magnetized in either polarity to rep resent a logical 1 s or 05 This type of data memory is read write and is nonvolatile Counter A location internal to the processor CPU which can be set to an initial number and increased and or decreased CRT Terminal A cathode ray tube used to display various infor mation ladder programs data lists and applica tion reports See data terminal GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 1 1 Current Loop A method of transmitting data that utilizes the presence and absence of current pulses Cursor A symbol on a CRT screen that indicates the next position that a character will be written Cycle 1 One completion of a sequence of operations 2 The interval of time to terminate a sequence of operation D Daisy Chain Term that represents the method of wiring the same signal to several devices Data general term for any type information processed by a computer or a programmable logic controller Data Link Equipment especially transmission cables and interfaces which complete the communications connections and permitting the transmission of data Data Processing procedure for collecting data acting it and producing a specific result Data Set A device that converts the signals of a data terminal to signal
295. the Control Data Register Settings option which you want to check Click the OK button to accept the screen settings of the Micro C Function Area Settings dialog box 2 Select the Convert ladder option from the Compile menu to compile your program 3 Select the Download program option from the Online menu to download your program to your PLC 4 Turn on the monitoring screen 5 From the Online menu select the Monitor option Enter the control data register setting number selected initially The data in the control data register should display as described in your PLC s hardware manual The following table provides an example of the Base Unit System Code D90 for various Micro PLCs Micro PLC Type Value of D90 Value of D90 Decimal HEX 24 I O type FC2A C24B1 1 1 16 I O type 2 16 1 2 2 10 I O type FC2A C10A1 4 4 AC input type 8 8 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 6 31 Protect source output type 10 A 24 I O type and AC input type 9 24 I O type and protect source 17 11 16 I O type and AC input type 10 A 16 I O type and protect source 18 12 10 I O type and AC input type 12 C 10 I O type and protect source 20 14 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 6 CONFIGURE MENU 6 32 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL ONC Function Area Settings Please refer to the instructions and information in the previous s
296. the target data increases in 16 bit increments 1 Source Destination Repeat 3 Repeat 3 0 7 M10 MI7 20 27 30 37 M40 M47 50 7 MOV SIR DIR D10 MO 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 63 If the repeat operation is designated for both the source and destination and if a portion of the source and destination areas overlap each other then the source data in the overlapped area is also changed MOV SIR DIR REP Source 010 013 Repeat 4 16 D10 D12 4 Destination D12 D15 Repeat 4 Results Before execution 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 64 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Right Mouse Advanced Instructions Move Move Not Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Move gt Move Not MOVN displays the Move Not MOVN dialog box Pro Mt REY 1 1 Tay Home ain Blluruten 0028870 T lepar lapasi fap Hare 1 IPLE 3 Accept the default Move Not in the Type field Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper S1 field Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field below Click the Repeat box below if necessary to indicate a repeat This is the operand from which data will be inverted and moved Enter the tag name or nickname in the upper D1 field Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field below Click the Repeat box
297. timer is read as source data Reversible counters CO and C1 start counting at the preset value and the cur rent value is incremented or decremented from the preset value Adding counters C2 through C31 start counting at 0 and the current value is incremented up to the preset value When any counter is designated as a source operand of an advanced instruction the current value is read as source data 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 56 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Using a Timer or a Counter as Destination Operand As described previously when a timer or counter is designated as the destination operand of an advanced instruction the result of the advanced instruction is set to the preset value of the timer or counter Since timer and counter preset values can be 0 through 9999 make sure that the result of the advanced instruction does not exceed 9999 If the result to be set to a timer or counter designated as the destination exceeds 9999 a user program execution error will result then error indicator is lit and special internal relay M304 turns on When a timer or counter preset value is designated using a data register the timer or counter cannot be designated as the destination of an advanced instruction When executing such an advanced instruction a user program execution error will result If a timer or counter is designated as the destination of an advanced instruction and if the timer or counter i
298. tion and all output statuses are maintained 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 2 ERROR CODES 2 12 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Error Code Error Details lh Overrun error data is received when the receive data registers are full 2h Framing error failure to detect start or stop bit 4h Parity error an error was found by the parity check 8h Receive time out line disconnected 10h BCC block check character error disparity with the data received up to BCC 20h Retry cycle over error occurred in all three trials of communication 40h definition quantity error error in the connection to the FA series PF3S SIF4 serial interface module When more than one error is detected in the expansion link or data link system the total of the error codes is indicated For example when a framing error error code 2h and a BCC error error code 10h are found error code 12 is displayed User Program Execution Error RUN Error This error indicates that invalid data is found during the execution of a user pro gram When this error occurs special internal relay M304 user program execu tion error is also turned on The detailed information of this error can be viewed from the error code indicated in the RUN error line This error code is stored in control data register D93 if it is enabled using FUN10 When this error occurs program operation and all output statuses are maintained APPENDIX
299. tion in modem mode When the modem mode is enabled see above the protocol at the loader port is switched from the user protocol depending on the value in D492 after the tele phone line is connected 0492 1 User protocol is continued at the loader port 0492 O Loader protocol is enabled at the loader port APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS OCo 1 fe 7 wale WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A1 27 Group 2 D491 Control signal status When group 2 is enabled as the expansion control data registers D491 stores a value to show that RTS DSR and DTR are on or off The data of D491 is updated at every END processing D491 Value RTS DSR DTR Description 0 OFF OFF OFF All RTS DSR and DTR are off ON OFF OFF RTS ison OFF OFF DSR ison ON ON OFF RTS and DSR are on OFF OFF DTRison ON OFF ON RTS and DTR are on OFF ON ON DSR and DTR are on NPD BR DO ON ON ON All RTS DSR and DTR are on D490 DSR control signal option When group 2 is enabled as the expansion control data registers D490 is used to control data flow between the Micro C and the remote terminal depending on the Data Set Ready DSR signal of the remote terminal The DSR signal is an input to the Micro C to determine the status of the remote terminal The remote terminal informs the Micro C using DSR whether the remo
300. tion output special internal relay which remains on while the program is executed The analog read 0 ANRO instruction sets the value of analog potentiometer 0 to D20 The PWM instruction is executed to generate output pulses The pulse width ratio is determined by the value of D20 Output QO sends out the output pulses 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 163 gt Analog To Digital Conversion A D Selecting Advanced Instructions gt Pulse and A D Conversion gt Analog Digital Conversion A D displays the Analog To Digital Conversion A D dialog box You may also click the toolbar button pied 0101 nalng Te Digha Digi Data Runge A bis T 12 bata Help In the Digital Data Range field click the circle of the appropriate selection either 8 bits or 12 bits This figure notes the analog to digital resolution Enter the tag name or nickname in the Tag Name field Then enter the associated operand in the Allocation Number field below This operand indicates the destination of the data conversion Finally optionally enter any associated comment in the Tag Name Comment field This reference may be a maximum of six characters per line for a maximum of four lines 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 164 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to activate the A D conversion
301. tion through the loader port using user protocol Protocol selector switch set to 1 or 3 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 1 24 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 2 D489 DTR control signal option D488 RTS control signal option D487 Reserved D486 RTS control signal ON OFF timer 3 D485 Lower byte Protocol selector switch value D485 Upper byte For maintenance D484 Lower byte Function selector switch value D484 Upper byte For maintenance D499 Expansion Control Data Register Service Selection D499 is used to enable or disable expansion control data register service for D484 through D498 divided into groups 0 3 Store a value D499 to enable or disable expansion control data service for groups 0 3 as described below D499 Value 8 0111213145 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 0 1004 B Om Cfo Ife JWa eh WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A1 25 The D499 value marked with X indicates that the data registers in the corre sponding group are enabled for the expansion control data register service The enable disable of expansion control data register service is determined by the lower four bits in D499 Although a value over 15 can be entered to D499 upper
302. ton to save the data type To back out of this dialog box without selecting a data type click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button Once an option is selected in the Type field and the OK button is pressed the Constant Character dialog box will display Di n2 ons Ciuma 7 gt 3 gt 2 Help If the Constant Character option was selected originally from the Data Type Selection dialog box then the Character field will display If the Constant Hex decimal option was selected originally from the Data Type Selection dialog box then the Hex decimal field will display 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 206 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL the S1 field of the Macro dialog box In the Hex decimal field enter the hex decimal data which will display in the 51 field of the Macro dialog box 5 In the Character field enter the character data which will display Once the dialog box is complete click the OK button to save the data To back out of this dialog box without selecting data click the Cancel button To access on line help click the Help button Right Mouse Advanced Instructions No Operation NOP Selecting Advanced Instructions gt No Operation NOP 2 literally programs rung to have no operation No operands can be programmed for the NOP instruction The NOP instruction may serve as a place holder
303. tor mode click the Cancel button To access on line help press the Help button Run Stop Status Use this field to start and stop the operation of your PLC When the PLC is not in run mode the Start button is available Additionally the status of the PLC displays as STOPPED When the PLC is in run mode the Stop button is available The status of the PLC now displays as RUNNING The PLC memorizes the Start Stop status before the power is turned off When the PLC is restarted it maintains same status as prior to its shutdown 8 ONLINE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 8 7 Tim Cnt Change Status When the status displays as CHANGED you may press the Clear button This function serves two purposes clear the modified counter and counter preset values e restore the original timer and counter preset values Once the Clear button has been pressed the status again displays as UNCHANGED Error Status Use this option to view all errors which have occurred during operations The number of the error displays in the accompanying field Clear Click the Clear button to erase errors after they have been fixed If an error has not been fixed it will not clear 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 8 ONLINE MENU WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Details gt gt Click the Details gt gt button to view information about the error number which displays in the accompanying field Clicking the Detail
304. transmitting receiving status The DTR control signal option can be used only in the user protocol to commu nicate through the loader port D489 0 While the Micro C is running DTR is on whether the Micro is transmitting or receiving data While the Micro C is stopped DTR remains off Use this option to indicate the Micro C operating status D489 0 is the system default D489 1 While the Micro C is transmitting data DTR is turned on While the Micro C is not transmitting data DTR remains off Use this option when a remote terminal operates in the half duplex mode since D TR goes on or off according to the transmit data from the Micro C 096052 While the Micro C is transmitting data DTR remains off While the Micro C is not transmitting data DTR is turned on The DTR operation at this option is contrary to the operation at D489 1 0489 DTR remains off 2001 IDEC CORPORATION APPENDIX 1 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 1 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL While the can receive data DTR is turned on Use this option when flow control of received data is required 0489 5 DTR is turned or off according to DSR When DSR is on DTR is turned on When DSR is off DTR remains off Use this option for returning con trol signals and acknowledgment when data flow control with the remote terminal is required D489 6 Same as D489 0
305. ual provides an introduction to programming IDEC s full line of programmable logic controllers PLCs using IDEC s Win dows based ladder logic software Use this manual as a reference for information about your software package NOTE Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Appendix 1 and Appendix 2 are geared toward the Micro series of PLC s For similar instructions and details on the FA Series the Open Net Controller ONC and MicroSmart PLC s please refer to the corre sponding hardware manuals The WindLDR Tutorial presents a simple quick step approach to get you up and running with a few basic applications The Tutorial is a perfect introduction to WindLDR or to programming your first PLC Using WindLDR can greatly increase productivity Its easy to use features and ability to quickly create ladder diagrams will save your company time and money WindLDR provides programming configuration for IDEC s full line of PLCs and creates a bridge between older application software and hardware 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL This chapter provides general description of the WindLDR software features e Documentation conventions used in the WindLDR manual set e Steps to a successful software installation WindLDR Version 4 0 Features WindLDR features cut and paste editing enhanced on line monitoring and a multi level undo option which is limited only by available memory W
306. uction should be used as required e In the high speed processing mode user communication instructions RXD and TXD cannot be used Receive Format The receive format designated by source operand S1 specifies data registers to store received data data digits for storing data data conversion type and repeat cycles A start delimiter and an end delimiter can be included in the receive for mat to discriminate valid incoming communication When some characters in the received data are not needed the skip be used to ignore a specified num ber of characters BCC code can also be appended to the receive format to verify the received data One RXD instruction can receive 200 bytes of data at the max imum S1 Source 1 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE Receive Operand Conversion Receive Notes Format Type Digits Bytes Data 00 0498 ASCII to binary 1 4 1 99 repeat Register ASCII to BCD 1 5 to binary No conversion 1 2 Start 00 No conversion 1 Delimiter 7Fh 10 22 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL End 00 No conversion 1 Delimiter 7Fh BCC Binary to ASCII 122 XOR calculation 1 15 calculation start position No conversion ADD calculation Skip 1 99 skip bytes Designating Data Register as S1 When a data register is designated as source operand 51 receive digits and con version t
307. ut statuses of Q1 and Q2 are held When both and 13 are off the first and second JMPs are not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of 14 through I6 Right Basic Instructions Program Flow End END Selecting Basic Instructions Program Flow 3 End END automatically dis plays the instructions associated with the end You may also click the toolbar button NOTE The right mouse button is context sensitive to the specific PLC selected This chapter is written in reference to the Micro PLC To access the right mouse button instructions for another PLC select the Configure 3 PLC Selection option The END instruction is always required at the end of a program However it is not necessary to program the END instruction after the last programmed instruction The END instruction already exists at every unused address When an address is used for programming the END instruction is removed 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 50 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL A scan is the execution of all instructions from address zero to the END instruc tion The time required for this execution is referred to as one scan time The scan time varies with respect to program length which corresponds to the address where the END instruction is found During the scan time program instructions are processed sequentially This is why the output instruction clo
308. uted When a constant value is designated at the first byte of source operand S1 the one byte data serves as a start delimiter to start the processing of the received data The valid start delimiter value depends on the data bits selected in the FUNS loader port communication mode setting When eight data bits are selected start delimiters can be 00h FFh When seven data bits are selected as default start delimiters can be 00h 7Fh Constant values are entered in hexa decimal notation into the source data A maximum of five RXD instructions with different start delimiters can be exe cuted at the same time When the first byte of the incoming data matches the start delimiter of an RXD instruction the received data is processed and stored according to the receive format specified in the RXD instruction If the first byte of the incoming data does not match the start delimiter of any RXD instruction that is executed the Micro C discards the incoming data and waits for the next communication While an RXD instruction without a start delimiter is executed any incoming data is processed continuously according to the receive format Only one RXD instruction without a start delimiter can be executed at a time If start inputs to two or more RXD instructions without a start delimiter are turned on simulta neously then the one at the smallest address is executed and the corresponding completion output is turned on 1O TRANSMIT REC
309. utput This is represented as one sec tion of a ladder logic diagram RS 232 C An E LA Electronic Industries Association stan dard covering the electrical and mechanical requirements for serial transmission between ter minal devices Because a voltage signal is utilized RS 232C signals are limited to short distances approximately 60 feet due to the voltage drop of the wires RS 422 An E LA Electronic Industries Association stan dard covering the electrical and mechanical requirements for serial transmission between ter minal devices RS 422 relies on the difference between two potentials allowing the sending and receiving devices to have different electrical GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 29 grounds thereby allowing for long up to two 2 miles communication distances Also Differential 5 Scan Time The time necessary to completely execute the entire programmable logic controller s pro grammed instructions one time Schematic A diagram of a circuit in which symbols illustrate circuit components SCR Abbr Silicon Controlled Rectifier A solid state three 3 terminal device which employs a control signal to switch a DC voltage load Also known as a THYRISTOR Serial Operation A type of information transfer within a program mable logic controller whereby the bits are handled sequentially rather than simultaneously as they are in a parallel operati
310. utton accesses the previous rung comment The button accesses the next rung comment Once all rung comments are entered click OK to save your changes and to close the Rung Comment dialog screen To access on line help press the icon NOTE There is no limit to the number of characters you may use in the rung com ments Use as much text as you need 4 EDIT MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 4 7 Edit gt Tag Name Editor Selecting the Tag Name Editor option from the Edit menu provides a conve nient way to find and edit coils in large ladder files It is possible to scroll through coils based on operand type tag name allocation number or comments dab rfi win REID ID IE PCI oe eh To select a Tag Name click on the entry to highlight it Once one is selected you may edit its tag name allocation number and tag name comment within the fields to the right Use the top field to edit the tag name the middle field to edit the allocation number and the bottom field to edit the tag name comment Clicking on the various headings will rearrange the order of the tag names accordingly To rearrange the tag names in ascending order click on the Tag Name heading To rearrange the allocation num bers in ascending order click on the Alloc No heading To rearrange the tag name comments in ascending order click on the Comment heading 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 4 EDIT MENU
311. values as specified The values of the timer or counter must be designated before transferring the program to the PLC bap ep ee e rome wramamaum am mama m uo ew rr To activate this option click the box to the left of Enable external display to show a check mark The Timer counter number field will display Refer to the specific PLC Hardware Manual for more information If the Default button is pressed this option turns off If an invalid timer or counter number is entered then an error message displays A valid number must be entered or the invalid number erased Key matrix setting Micro 1 only Use this option to set the key matrix which consists of 64 points These points are configured using 8 in and 28 out To activate this option click the box to the left of Enable key matrix scan to show a check mark The Input number field will display Refer to the Micro 1 Hardware Manual for more information 6 CONFIGURE MENU 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Then in the Input number field select the desired range either 100 107 or 110 117 If the Default button is pressed this option turns off External Display Latch condition setting Use this option to set the latch condition for the PLC when using the external display function To activate this option click the circle to the left of either the Low latch or High latch option accordingly If the Default button i
312. vice placed in a circuit to which power is delivered 2 The process of entering data into the processor s memory Location A storage position in memory uniquely specified by an address Local 1 Physically mounting the 1 0 frame rack close proximity to the processor 2 The term used for the I O modules mounted within the same I 0 frame rack as the processor Logic A means of solving complex problems through the repeated use of simple functions which define basic concepts The three 3 basic logic functions are AND OR and NOT Logic Level The voltage magnitude associated with signal pulses representing ones 5 vdc and zeros 0 vdc Loop The repeated execution of series of instructions for a fixed number of times GLOSSARY 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL GLOSSARY 21 Magnetic Core A device used for storing a bit of information in a programmable logic controller See core memory Magnetic Tape A ribbon of plastic coated tape for use in magnetic recording used to store information Matrix A logic network in the form of a array of inputs leads and outputs leads with logic elements provid ing inter connections Medium Scale Any integrated circuit which has between 12 and Integration 100 equivalent gates Memory A device in which data is stored and may be retrieved Memory Module A modular card consisting of a memory circuit and is capable of stori
313. y Check G 25 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX password protect 8 12 Paste 2 5 Paste option 4 2 PC G 25 Peripheral G 25 Pilot Type Device G 25 platforms different 1 3 PLC G 25 PLC Selection dialog box 5 2 option 6 2 PLC Status Calendar 8 10 common error numbers and descriptions 8 9 dialog box 8 19 Error Code dialog screen 8 8 Error Status 8 7 option 8 6 Protect Status 8 11 Run Stop Status 8 6 Set Calendar and Time dialog box 8 10 Tim Cnt Change Status 8 7 PLC Status dialog screen 1 3 PLC Status option 8 5 Point Write dialog screen 1 3 8 17 Bit Set Reset 8 19 Word Write 8 17 Port G 25 pplication Program G 4 Precision G 25 print preview 1 2 3 5 Print Setup option 3 7 Printed Circuit G 25 printing the ladder program 3 5 Processor G 26 Program G 26 Program Compare option 3 6 Program Flow instruction 9 42 9 45 Programmable Logic Controller G 26 programming precautions Transmit TXD 10 9 PROM G 26 Protect Status 8 12 dialog box 8 11 Protocol G 27 PULS equation 9 153 instruction 9 150 ladder diagram 9 151 9 154 9 155 operands 9 151 output frequency 9 152 pulse motor speed control 9 154 wiring diagram 9 156 Pulse G 27 Pulse and A D Conversion instructions 9 149 pulse motor speed control Pulse Output PULS 9 154 Pulse Output PULS equation 9 153 instruction 9 150 ladder diagram 9 151 9 154 9 155 operands 9 151 output frequency 9 152 pulse motor speed control 9 154 wiring diagram 9 156 Pulse Output Cont
314. y M315 Function Keys 4 8 HSCO soft reset 9 171 Tag Name option 3 6 9 178 Tag Name search 4 4 HSC2 9 188 tag names HSC3 9 194 Operand type 4 9 Split Rung show operands 4 10 instruction 9 208 Tape Reader G 31 State G 30 technical support 1 6 Static G 31 Teletype G 32 Status G 31 10 msec Timer TMH Status Bar option 5 2 instruction 9 22 Storage G 31 Terminal G 32 SUB Terminator G 32 instruction 9 92 The 4 1 ladder diagram 9 97 Thumb Wheel Switch G 32 operands 9 94 Thyristor G 32 repeat operation 9 99 TIM 9 7 9 43 9 46 Subtraction SUB instruction 9 22 instruction 9 92 ladder diagram 9 25 ladder diagram 9 97 time scheduled control 2000 IDEC CORPORATION INDEX INDEX XXII WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Adjust ADJ 9 132 Timer circuit 9 25 instructions 9 22 ladder diagrams 9 24 table 9 24 Timer TIM 9 7 Timeshare G 32 tip message 2 4 Tip Message option 5 2 TMH 9 7 9 43 9 46 instruction 9 22 TMS 9 7 9 43 9 46 instruction 9 22 Tool Bar option 5 1 Tool Bar on and off 5 1 Transceiver G 32 Transducer G 32 Transfer Module G 32 transmission status codes 10 18 transmit completion output 10 17 data 10 10 data byte count 10 19 status 10 18 Transmit TXD BCC digits bytes 10 17 block check character BCC 10 15 conversion type 10 12 designating constant as 51 10 11 designating data register as S1 10 11 instruction 10 1 10 8 ladder diagram 10 8 operands 10 8 programming precautions 10 9 repeat cyc
315. y in comparison to the output frequency When 0 is monitored while the PULS instruction is executed QO remains on and the output indicator also remains on When input to the PULS instruction is turned off while the pulse output is on the output is turned off after a com plete pulse is generated Output Frequency WindLDR displays MODEI through MODE4 on the ladder However when selecting the base frequency in the dialog box the actual frequencies are dis played not the MODE 9 EDITING THE LADDER 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 9 153 MODE Base Frequency Range Frequency Coefficient 249 through MODEI 4882 81Hz 9 574 through 406 901 Hz MODE2 9765 63 Hz 19 148 through 813 802 Hz MODE3 78 125 Hz 153 186 through 6510 42 Hz MODE4 156 250 Hz 306 373 through 13020 8 Hz The output frequency is determined by the following equation Base Frequency MODE Pulse Width Coefficient S1 6 x 2 Output Frequency Hz Base Frequency MODE Pulse Width Coefficient S1 6 Output Frequency x 2 1 4 5 Period 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 9 EDITING THE LADDER 9 154 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Example PULS This example explains how to set 1 kHz output pulses using the PULS instruc tion From the preceding table base frequencies 78 125 Hz and 156 250 Hz can be used to set 1 kHz If MODEZ is selected then
316. ypes must also be designated The received data is divided into a block of specified receive digits converted in a specified conversion type and stored in the designated data register Conversion types are available in ASCII to binary ASCII to BCD to binary and no conversion When a repeat is designated received data is divided converted and stored in as many data registers as repeat cycles starting with the designated data register Up to 99 repeat cycles can be used 1O TRANSMIT RECEIVE 2001 IDEC CORPORATION WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL 10 23 Receive Digits The received data is divided into a block of specified receive digits before conver sion as described below Example Received data of six bytes are divided in different receive digits A repeat is also designated 1 Receive Digits 2 1 9 3 4 g 6 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 2 digits 2 digits 2 digits 1st block 2nd block 3rd block 2 Receive Digits 3 Te 2 3 4 5 6 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 3 digits 3 digits 1st block 2nd block 2001 IDEC CORPORATION 10 TRANSMIT RECEIVE 10 24 WINDLDR REFERENCE MANUAL Conversion Type The data block of the specified receive digits is then converted according to the designated conversion type as described below Example Received data has been divided into a two digit block 1 ASCII gt b

WLDR ReferenceBook - Steven Engineering

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents